*** empty log message ***
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
e90813b8 39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support.
d9c9b920 40
1fa28578
GM
41\f
42* Changes in Emacs 21.1
43
a01cfb77
GM
44** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
45changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
46buffer by default.
47
c607d53d 48** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 49trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
50this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
51
4104194e
GM
52** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
53be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
54
c6f01e00
MB
55** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
56To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
57`auto-compression-mode' command.
58
4c724b32
DL
59** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
60`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
61
b856f39c 62+++
068127d6
GM
63** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
64operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
65
fd06c7da
MB
66** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
67(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
68remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
69may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
70
8ac08dea 71+++
62c273d7
DL
72** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
73is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
74
75+++
76** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
77mode `iswitchb-mode'.
78
8ac08dea 79+++
f393cf90
DL
80** Gnus changes.
81
82The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
83four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
84internationalization and mail-fetching.
85
86*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
87many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
88
89If you used procmail like in
90
91(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
92(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
93(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
94(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
95
327652be 96this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
97
98(setq mail-sources
99 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
100 :suffix ".in")))
101
102More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
103Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
104
105*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
106Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
4301cf66
DL
107Separate MIME packages like RMIME, SEMI, mime-compose etc., will
108probably no longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
f393cf90 109
60dd7e0e 110*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
111parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
112are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
113now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
114
115*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
116called to position point.
117
118*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
119summary buffers and NOV files.
120
121*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
122of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
123
124*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
125subtly different manner.
126
127*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
128and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
129ever-changing layouts.
130
131*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
132
72190b84 133*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
134
135** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1368859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
137more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
138empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
139window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
140on.
141
ba9eeda1
GM
142** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
143set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
144file that is already visited under a different name.
145
42ac0ae5
GM
146** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
147nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
148
149** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
150recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
151signaled.
152
ba9eeda1 153** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
154support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
155use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
156buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
157M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
158new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
159
b941a14b 160+++
ba9eeda1 161** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 162and displays information about that.
b941a14b 163
ba9eeda1 164** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
165file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
166
d7b38c05 167** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 168added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
169Postscript files are included.
170
171** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
172`dired-ref.tex'.
173
25ad1371
GM
174** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
175expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
176
177This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
178determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
179mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
180interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
181regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
182associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
183
b856f39c 184+++
f0298744
DL
185** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
186displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
187menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
188menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
189
9a8d84ca
DL
190** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
191a version-dependent component.
192
d76c03ea
GM
193** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
194Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
195will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
196character is still bound as before.
197
3b4fa1b2
DL
198** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
199using that menu.
200
40e857ea 201** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 202suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 203
beb2eb00 204+++
c08398de
DL
205** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
206buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
207contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
208by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
209insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
210the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
211Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
212
db7a3ede 213+++
3d6cd763
GM
214** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
215coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
216escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
217such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
218recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 219always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 220read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
221(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
222RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 223
0b8a3a6d
DL
224** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
225environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
226
424d8b44 227+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
228** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
229point in a pop-up window.
230
6d35b49f 231+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
232** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
233displays all characters in that character set.
234
235** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
236coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
237
a4067978 238+++
5cb6a58e 239** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 240on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
241defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
242commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 243
424d8b44 244+++
a1b8d58b
GM
245** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
246
6e417ca5
DL
247** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
248been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
249
424d8b44 250+++
5898e075
DL
251** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
252`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
253indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
254indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
255
424d8b44 256+++
abfcc168
GM
257** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
258sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 259(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
260You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
261
424d8b44 262+++
cc181e95
GM
263** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
264on the display using several methods
265
424d8b44 266+++
cc181e95
GM
267- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
268a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
269be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
270
424d8b44 271+++
cc181e95 272- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 273equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 274
da4496b6 275- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
276
277- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
278the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
279
424d8b44 280+++
3b4fa1b2 281** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 282an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 283command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 284does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 285
424d8b44 286+++
176256a1 287** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
288`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
289typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 290
dd0add8e
DL
291** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
292characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
293
bf3ba9ac 294+++
699238d9
GM
295** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
296compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
297this behavior.
298
299The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
300compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
301Emacs dump core.
302
424d8b44 303+++
699238d9 304** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 305
7233c5bd
GM
306*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
307whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
308is useful for debugging X problems.
309
310Example:
311
699238d9 312 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 313
100b3cbb
GM
314*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
315visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
316the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
317and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
318visual class names are
319
320 TrueColor
321 PseudoColor
322 DirectColor
323 StaticColor
324 GrayScale
325 StaticGray
326
327Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
328`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
329meaning.
330
331The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
332supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
333`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
334visual.
335
336Example:
337
699238d9 338 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
339
340*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
341specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
342default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
343resource values are `true' or `on'.
344
345Example:
346
699238d9 347 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 348
0d0c76b8
EZ
349** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
350more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
351now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
352
42088c12 353** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 354display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
355shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
356be customized.
c60ea02e 357
424d8b44 358+++
31047e0d
DL
359** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
360
424d8b44 361+++
b02786f9
GM
362** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
363all frames except the selected one.
364
3261c1d8
DL
365** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
366to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
367
ffe36136 368** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
369the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
370MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
371displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
372
0292b49f 373+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
374** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
375MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 376
559cee90
DL
377** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
378read mail from the menu etc.
379
480b5773 380+++
271b4185
GM
381** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
382a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
383
0daee095
GM
384** Changes in Texinfo mode.
385
a5e350c9 386*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
387macros
388
389 Key binding Macro
390 -------------------------
391 C-c C-c C-s @strong
392 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 393 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 394 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 395 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
396 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
397 M-RET @item
398
399*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 400
559cee90
DL
401** Changes in Outline mode.
402
403There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
404`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
405the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
406
327652be 407** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 408
c0a8c108
EZ
409+++
410*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
411with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
412are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
413Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
414buffers to kill, as before.
415
416Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 417i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
418this way.
419
956777b3
GM
420** Changes to Show Paren mode.
421
422*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
423The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
424use. Default is 1000.
425
f6989277 426+++
404fa7d6
DL
427** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
428groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
429
424d8b44
DL
430+++
431** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
432M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
433M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
434buffers.
8964fec7 435
424d8b44 436+++
39783d73
WP
437** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
438under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
439.emacs file.
440
441The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
442determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
443
d35fce81
GM
444** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
445abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
446`directory-abbrev-alist'.
447
a933dad1
DL
448** Faces and frame parameters.
449
450There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
451Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
452`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
453`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
454sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
455for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
456parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
457
458Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
459`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 460`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
461`default' face and vice versa.
462
d80061fa 463+++
f77a4a8a
GM
464** New face `menu'.
465
466The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
467Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
468attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
469
424d8b44 470+++
a933dad1
DL
471** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
472
473The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
474colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
475correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
476the screen gamma of a frame's display.
477
478PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
479in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
480color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
481
482The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
483`ScreenGamma'.
484
485** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
486
487The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
488Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
489oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
490of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
491the text.
492
493** Emacs has a new face implementation.
494
495The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
496font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
497height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
498These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
499specify a font.
500
501Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
502These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
503under Lisp changes, below.
504
505** New default font is Courier 12pt.
506
424d8b44
DL
507+++
508** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
509of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
510otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
511
512** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
513truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
514foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
515customizing face `fringe'.
516
8d0f00fd
MB
517** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
518You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
519
520The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
521versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
522and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
523
524** LessTif support.
525
424d8b44
DL
526Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
527You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
528
529** Toolkit scroll bars.
530
531Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
532LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
533configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
534bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
535bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
536Emacs.
537
538When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
539Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
540Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
541Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
542define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
543`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
544
545Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
546a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
547directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
548different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
549system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
550add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
551
552The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
553`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
554This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
555image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
556Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
557
558** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
559
560When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
561widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
562Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
563
424d8b44 564+++
a933dad1
DL
565** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
566
567When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
568whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
569defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
570highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
571displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
572whitespace.
573
6e612d4d 574+++
a933dad1
DL
575** Busy-cursor.
576
577Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
578display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
579
424d8b44 580+++
a933dad1
DL
581** Blinking cursor
582
583M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
584terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
585and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
586the group `cursor'.
587
8ac08dea 588+++
a933dad1
DL
589** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
590
591This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
592generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
593See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
594details.
595
596Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
597have to do anything to activate it.
598
599** Tabs and variable-width text.
600
601Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
602defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
603independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
604Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
605
606** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
607
424d8b44 608+++
a933dad1
DL
609*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
610
611 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
612
79dd1637
RS
613The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
614LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 615
79dd1637
RS
616*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
617LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 618
34d90e29 619+++
a933dad1
DL
620** Hscrolling in C code.
621
cc181e95
GM
622Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
623`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
624customized.
a933dad1 625
8ac08dea 626+++
a933dad1
DL
627** Tool bar support.
628
629Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
630of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
631changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
b97cd2cc
DL
632displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
633if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
634icons will be used.
635
636To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
637for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
638also be useful manually to touch up some of the PBM icons.
a933dad1 639
424d8b44 640+++
a933dad1
DL
641** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
642
643Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
644mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
645line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
646about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
647in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
648
649Currently, the following actions have been defined:
650
651- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
652buffers.
653
654- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
655M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
656
657- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
658
424d8b44
DL
659- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
660`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
661
662- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
663
664** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
665
666When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 667from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
668non-nil.
669
670** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
671
672Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
673Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
674the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
675italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
676Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
677attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
678on terminals.
a933dad1 679
54a9404d
EZ
680The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
681supported on character terminals.
682
a933dad1
DL
683** Sound support
684
2f516940 685Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 686driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 687supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 688
424d8b44 689+++
a933dad1
DL
690** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
691the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
692forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
693value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
694users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
695even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
696
697The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
698
0e18b431 699+++
a933dad1
DL
700** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
701
702As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
703drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
704`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
705
fdd8bb68 706+++
a933dad1
DL
707** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
708bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
709
710This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
711`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
712variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
713
c5d00c64 714+++
a933dad1
DL
715** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
716
717When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 718value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 719number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 720fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
721
722When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
723value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
724number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 725fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
726
727** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
728notably at the end of lines.
729
730All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
731spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
732
424d8b44 733+++
eee54b0e
DL
734There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
735
a933dad1
DL
736** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
737query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
738after each match to get the replacement text.
739
00782214 740+++
d5483ab1
GM
741** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
742you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 743
424d8b44 744** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
745you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
746lisp-complete-symbol.
747
7af69644 748+++
a933dad1
DL
749** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
750
163ea954 751If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
752longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
753is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
754minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
755
756- User option: max-mini-window-height
757
758Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
759fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 760specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
761
762Default is 0.25.
763
a299a6f0
GM
764- User option: resize-mini-windows
765
766How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 767resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
768grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
769again.
770
771Default is `grow-only'.
772
2f72fd2f
GM
773** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
774
0d43b60d
GM
775** Changes to hideshow.el
776
777Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
778selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
779conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
780
781*** Generalized block selection and traversal
782
783A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
784(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
785which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
786`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
787point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
788(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
789
790If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
791i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
792backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
793the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
794
795*** Isearch support for updating mode line
796
797During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
798blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
799line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
800portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
801is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
802
803To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
804something like this in your .emacs.
805
806 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
807 (lambda ()
808 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
809
327652be
TTN
810*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
811
812Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
813header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
814`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
815moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
816block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
817behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
818useful.
819
820You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
821function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
822of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
823code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
824appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
825
826(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
827 (hs-hide-level 1)
828 (forward-sexp 1))
829(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
830
831The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
832emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
833only for code blocks.
834
835*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
836
837Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
838parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
839display for implementation.
840
841*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
842
843The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
844LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
845which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
846new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
847
848 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
849 hs-show-block C-c C-s
850 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
851 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
852 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
853 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
854 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
855
856These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
857
559cee90
DL
858** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
859
424d8b44 860+++
1b24b888
GM
861*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
862an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
863log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
864
424d8b44 865+++
1b24b888
GM
866**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
867current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
868
869+++
1b24b888
GM
870*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
871in a log file.
eb2aac9d 872
502004be 873+++
1b24b888
GM
874*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
875entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 876
502004be 877+++
1b24b888 878*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
879version number is performed based on regular expressions from
880`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
881Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 882
2c63c979 883*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 884
79c78e77
GM
885** Changes to cmuscheme
886
887*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
888`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
889
3476b54a
GM
890** Changes in Font Lock
891
892*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 893font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 894
2c63c979
SM
895*** multiline patterns are now supported.
896
a5e350c9
SM
897*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
898the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 899
601e0081
SM
900*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
901Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
902
b3b98592
GM
903** Comint (subshell) changes
904
988cded7
MB
905These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
906include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
907
908*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
909to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
910parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
911user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
912this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
913respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
914feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
915`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
916
917*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
918and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
919
988cded7 920*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
921buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
922buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
923
924The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
925M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
926the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
927
988cded7
MB
928*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
929and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
930see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 931
988cded7 932*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
933saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
934argument, it appends to the file.
935
988cded7 936*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
937(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
938compatibility.
939
0e40b809
EL
940*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
941ring (history).
d648cc45 942
e26cec67
GM
943** Changes to Rmail mode
944
b97cd2cc 945*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
c0510d27
GM
946set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
947receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
948recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
949`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
950as correspondent.
951
952Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
953mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 954regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 955
3b55acc9
GM
956*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
957to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
958Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
959with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
960for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
961
6a1950ec
GM
962*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
963like `j'.
964
5bb6f079
RS
965*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
966specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 967digest message.
e26cec67 968
993d8b7d
DL
969*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
970in which folder to put messages automatically.
971
400a1ed0
GM
972** Changes to TeX mode
973
a5e350c9 974*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
975`latex-mode'.
976
a5e350c9
SM
977*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
978
979*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
980
981*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 982
a933dad1
DL
983** Changes to RefTeX mode
984
985*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
986 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
987 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
988 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
989 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
990 can be edited from that buffer.
991
992*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
993 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
994 `A' to use all marked entries).
995
996*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
997 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
998
999*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1000 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1001 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1002 been cited.
1003
38de9631
GM
1004** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1005The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1006semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1007in column 1 are always made leaves.
1008
a933dad1
DL
1009** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1010has the following new features:
1011
1012*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1013may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1014to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1015time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1016
1017*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1018feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1019file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1020compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1021pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1022defaults to 1.
1023
5d94f558 1024** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1025file names.
1026
424d8b44 1027+++
a933dad1
DL
1028** Tooltips.
1029
1030Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1031mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1032turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1033
1034Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1035variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1036the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1037tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1038
424d8b44 1039+++
a933dad1
DL
1040** Customize changes
1041
1042*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1043`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1044cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1045
1046*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1047Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1048default).
1049
0ae51efb
GM
1050*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1051between custom options. Example:
1052
1053 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1054 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1055 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1056 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1057 :group 'mule
1058 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1059 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1060
1061This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1062current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1063first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1064
a933dad1
DL
1065** New features in evaluation commands
1066
5e03eb84 1067*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1068modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1069print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1070customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1071eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1072
5e03eb84
GM
1073*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1074code when called with a prefix argument.
1075
ead53494
GM
1076** Ispell changes
1077
37d8a691 1078+++
bbe15990
EZ
1079*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1080transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1081spell-checks the current buffer.
1082
37d8a691 1083+++
385ff9e3
GM
1084*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1085added.
1086
1087*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1088correction is made and re-checked.
1089
74ec6045 1090*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1091
1092*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1093cases.
1094
1095*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1096on syntax errors.
1097
1098*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1099end of the buffer.
1100
a933dad1
DL
1101** Dired changes
1102
1103*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1104command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1105is, delete only empty directories.
1106
1107*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1108command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1109copy directories recursively.
1110
f6737cde
GM
1111*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1112in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1113the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1114
2f72fd2f
GM
1115*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1116replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1117directory.
1118
7381ae05
MB
1119*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1120a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1121This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1122will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1123accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1124
e024b101
GM
1125*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1126from ls switches.
1127
60b392a7
MB
1128*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1129of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1130which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1131source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1132
a933dad1
DL
1133** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1134use the -f option when sending mail.
1135
b1c609b1
GM
1136** CC mode changes.
1137
1138Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1139current user setups (although it's believed that these
1140incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1141However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1142back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1143compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1144release.
1145
7972fcfc
GM
1146*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1147This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1148of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1149non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1150want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1151have to bother.
1152
1153Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1154situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1155and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1156If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1157the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1158by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1159
b1c609b1
GM
1160*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1161When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1162variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1163take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1164is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1165settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1166possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1167Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1168
1169By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1170special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1171the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1172of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1173above.
1174
1175Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1176when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1177function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1178call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1179then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1180values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1181only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1182function documentation for more info.
1183
1184The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1185especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1186with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1187intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1188such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1189is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1190configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1191global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1192
1193(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1194
1195**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1196This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1197
1198This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1199variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1200completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1201the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1202empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1203style system.
1204
1205**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1206In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1207c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1208as far as possible.
1209
1210*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1211CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1212surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1213chapter about this in the manual.
1214
1215**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1216The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1217recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1218primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1219adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1220
1221**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1222This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1223c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1224
1225**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1226This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1227
1228It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1229Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1230A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1231inside CC Mode.
1232
1233Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1234causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1235the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1236available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1237cc-mode/).
1238
1239**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1240The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1241specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1242literals.
1243
1244**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1245It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1246prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1247you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1248this function.
1249
1250*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1251It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1252to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1253struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1254Thanks to Eric Eide.
1255
1256*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1257It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1258opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1259
1260**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1261
1262*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1263See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1264better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1265and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1266
1267*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1268previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1269the column specified by comment-column.
1270
1271*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1272In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1273is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1274prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1275contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1276don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1277
1278*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1279instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1280arguments.
1281
1282*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1283
1284*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1285c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1286c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1287variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1288Provan).
1289
1290*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1291
c407c570
GM
1292** Makefile mode changes
1293
1294*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1295
5d94f558 1296*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1297Fontlock mode is active.
1298
87be76f6
GM
1299** Isearch changes
1300
3353ef5a
GM
1301*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1302so that searches can be resumed.
1303
1304*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1305respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1306that started the search.
1307
87be76f6 1308*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1309selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1310
c8a8458a 1311+++
87be76f6
GM
1312*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1313
d35fce81 1314Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1315`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1316search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1317before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1318highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1319`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1320
1321The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1322will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1323Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1324using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1325usual snappy response.
1326
1327If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1328matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1329set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1330isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1331
21bc6203 1332+++
35384f06
GM
1333** Changes in sort.el
1334
1335The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1336as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1337new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1338numeric base.
87be76f6 1339
d7b511c4
GM
1340** Changes to Ange-ftp
1341
424d8b44 1342+++
d7b511c4 1343*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1344names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1345sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1346
d7b511c4
GM
1347*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1348ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1349
9d453139
SS
1350*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1351output ^M at the end of lines.
1352
4b9347b3
GM
1353** Shell script mode changes.
1354
1355Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1356derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1357sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1358
79214ddf
FP
1359** Etags changes.
1360
1361*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1362
aca0be23 1363*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1364possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1365{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1366This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1367a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1368
79214ddf
FP
1369*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1370declarations when given the --declarations option.
1371
1372*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1373"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1374
1375*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1376types.
1377
de370c4c 1378*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1379
1380*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1381
1382*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1383are now tagged.
1384
1385*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1386variables are tagged.
1387
1388*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1389
8dc78b52
FP
1390*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1391for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1392
c8d94f86 1393+++
f6737cde
GM
1394** Changes in etags.el
1395
3f6e4b8b
GM
1396*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1397tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1398is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1399
f6737cde
GM
1400*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1401the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1402
1403If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1404FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1405TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1406obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1407
1408TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1409
1410FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1411List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1412
1413A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1414
1415 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1416 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1417 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1418
1419*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1420of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1421
1422*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1423names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1424
424d8b44 1425+++
fbc164de
PE
1426** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1427and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1428LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1429
c3eb1f10 1430+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1431** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1432Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14338859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1434GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
14358859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1436releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1437(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1438
424d8b44 1439+++
163ea954 1440** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1441remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1442appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1443
1444** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1445
424d8b44 1446+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1447** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1448
6ab8d72d 1449+++
f6499c03 1450** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1451containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1452expression from that list, are not checked.
1453
5d94f558
SS
1454** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1455When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1456and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1457the buffer, just like for the local files.
1458
dc28878c
GM
1459** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1460
df8a9f78 1461+++
95931eb1
GM
1462** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1463displays local abbrevs, only.
1464
54baed30
GM
1465** VC Changes
1466
1467VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1468easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1469Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1470to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1471changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1472`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1473version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1474each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1475file is registered in that backend.
1476
1477When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1478backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1479directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1480master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1481the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1482As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1483
1484The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1485still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1486RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1487vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1488where it doesn't make sense.)
1489
1490The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1491obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1492`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1493
1494*** General Changes
1495
1496The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1497checks are always done now.
1498
327652be 1499VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1500operations.
1501
c286608e
SM
1502`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1503`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1504`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1505
22933be8
AS
1506The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1507first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1508current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1509the working file (``merge news'').
1510
1511The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1512(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1513downwards.
1514
1515*** Multiple Backends
1516
1517VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1518useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1519repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1520commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1521local RCS archives.
1522
1523To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1524should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1525backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1526`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1527
1528If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1529it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1530Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1531by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1532backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1533VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1534happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1535from the more remote backend.
1536
1537If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1538another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1539any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1540pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1541
1542After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1543changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1544local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1545buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1546
54baed30
GM
1547*** Changes for CVS
1548
1549There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1550default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1551remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1552by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1553regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1554that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1555queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1556
22933be8
AS
1557If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1558repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1559revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1560any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1561backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1562number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1563(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1564of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1565the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1566automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1567since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1568name.)
22933be8 1569
54baed30
GM
1570If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1571repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1572If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1573commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1574current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1575entire directory tree.
1576
1577The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1578"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1579is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1580"watched" by other developers.)
1581
22933be8
AS
1582The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1583(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1584an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1585starting at the given directory.
1586
54baed30
GM
1587*** Lisp Changes in VC
1588
1589VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1590add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1591library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1592then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1593a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1594provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1595of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1596you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1597`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1598
a933dad1
DL
1599** New modes and packages
1600
b95b34e5
GM
1601*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1602rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1603shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1604
1605Features are:
1606
1607- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1608 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1609 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1610 | / \
1611
1612- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1613 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1614 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1615 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1616 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1617 you are drawing.
1618
1619- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1620 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1621
1622- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1623 flood-filling.
1624
1625- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1626 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1627 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1628 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1629
b95b34e5
GM
1630- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1631 also do without the mouse.
1632
1633- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1634 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1635 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1636 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1637 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1638
1639- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1640
1641 lines straight-lines
1642 rectangles squares
1643 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1644 ellipses circles
1645 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1646 spray-can setting size for spraying
1647 vaporize line vaporize lines
1648 erase characters erase rectangles
1649
1650 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1651 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1652 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1653 drawing.
1654
1655 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1656 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1657 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1658 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1659
1660- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1661 can be turned off).
1662
4473cdd9
JW
1663+++
1664*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1665implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1666It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1667functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1668history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1669will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1670the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1671rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1672all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1673
ff332647 1674+++
90cbf47e
GM
1675*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1676intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1677typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1678on certain projects.
1679
894ca69e 1680+++
90cbf47e 1681*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1682regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1683
d96d6bb0 1684 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1685
1686will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1687face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1688typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1689Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1690appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1691current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1692corresponding file is read.
1693
424d8b44 1694+++
d96d6bb0 1695*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1696Emacs is idle.
1697
31fc5d15
GM
1698*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1699parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1700
5cb6a58e
SM
1701*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1702package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1703be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1704`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1705comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1706
424d8b44 1707+++
578979ee
GM
1708*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1709facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1710separate Texinfo file.
1711
424d8b44
DL
1712+++
1713*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1714by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1715provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1716`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1717enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1718
424d8b44 1719+++
6abca616
EZ
1720*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1721without invoking external programs.
1722
1723The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1724and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1725`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1726is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1727Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1728
1729The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1730page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1731
719e2c6e 1732+++
5e5dff44
GM
1733*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1734authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1735
1736The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1737the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1738the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1739Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1740even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1741single step.
1742
1743On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1744matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1745probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1746contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1747
424d8b44 1748+++
f7136ee8
GM
1749*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1750unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1751actually modifying content of a buffer.
1752
bbd9b566
GM
1753*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1754PostScript.
1755
1756Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1757
1758The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1759
1760 ; comment (until end of line)
1761 A non-terminal
1762 "C" terminal
1763 ?C? special
1764 $A default non-terminal
1765 $"C" default terminal
1766 $?C? default special
1767 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1768 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1769 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1770 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1771 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1772 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1773 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1774 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1775 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1776 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1777 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1778 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1779 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1780 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1781 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1782
1783Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1784
99453a38
GM
1785*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1786align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1787determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1788example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1789equal signs of assignments.
1790
424d8b44 1791+++
559cee90
DL
1792*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1793paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1794
424d8b44 1795+++
6448a6b3
GM
1796*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1797list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1798buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1799customize the package.
1800
6344985d
GM
1801*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1802
249652b1
GM
1803*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1804replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1805is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1806and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1807not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1808which answers different needs.
1809
424d8b44 1810+++
3476b54a
GM
1811*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1812suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1813expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1814course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1815reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1816to be enabled.
1817
424d8b44 1818+++
8964fec7
SM
1819*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1820containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1821
424d8b44 1822+++
a933dad1
DL
1823*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1824
424d8b44 1825+++
a933dad1
DL
1826*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1827
1828*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1829
8901d1ac
GM
1830Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1831`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1832disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1833`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1834displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1835and background colors.
1836
a933dad1
DL
1837*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1838Pascal) language.
1839
f6499c03 1840+++
a933dad1
DL
1841*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1842the text at point.
1843
1844*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1845
424d8b44 1846+++
8d54eb69
DL
1847*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1848
a933dad1
DL
1849*** whitespace.el ???
1850
ebcfda83
GM
1851*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1852files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1853(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1854interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1855often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1856uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1857codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1858
1859*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1860
1861Here is an example of columns:
1862
1863horse apple bus
1864dog pineapple car EXTRA
1865porcupine strawberry airplane
1866
1867Doing the following settings:
1868
1869 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1870 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1871 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1872 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1873
1874
1875Selecting the lines above and typing:
1876
1877 M-x delimit-columns-region
1878
1879It results:
1880
1881[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1882[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1883[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1884
1885delim-col has the following options:
1886
1887 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1888 before all columns.
1889
1890 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1891 between each column.
1892
1893 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1894 after all columns.
1895
1896 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1897 each column.
1898
1899delim-col has the following commands:
1900
1901 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1902 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1903
424d8b44 1904+++
f507826c 1905*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1906were operated on recently.
1907
1908M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1909
31fc5d15
GM
1910M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1911recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1912
31fc5d15
GM
1913M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1914filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1915file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1916
31fc5d15
GM
1917- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1918- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1919- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1920
31fc5d15
GM
1921The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1922dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1923
8062f458
DL
1924*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1925text.
1926
424d8b44 1927+++
36e24b82 1928*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1929of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1930specific to Message mode.
1931
424d8b44 1932+++
36e24b82
DL
1933*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1934viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1935with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1936
424d8b44 1937+++
aaa659ef
DL
1938*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1939interface to access directory servers using different directory
1940protocols. It has a separate manual.
1941
eee54b0e
DL
1942*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1943for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1944
424d8b44 1945+++
612839b6
GM
1946*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1947
5d94f558 1948*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1949minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1950
399da7e3
DL
1951*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1952with the diary features.
1953
6e417ca5
DL
1954*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1955numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1956
4a27bdfb
GM
1957*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1958Fill mode.
1959
60dd7e0e
DL
1960*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1961Gnus facilities.
1962
dace60cf
JW
1963*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
1964facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
1965difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
1966they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 1967
965bc065
DL
1968+++
1969** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
1970paragraphs filled as you modify them.
1971
1972+++
1973** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
1974to be visited as images.
1975
a933dad1
DL
1976** Withdrawn packages
1977
1978*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1979functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1980
3261c1d8
DL
1981*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1982
1983*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1984
1985\f
01242779
DL
1986* Incompatible Lisp changes
1987
1988There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
1989may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
1990
1991** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
1992`(format %s foo)' no longer works to remove properties.
1993
1994** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
1995which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
1996may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
1997these properties are active.
1998
4dd4cc14 1999** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 2000ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
2001
2002** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2003buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2004make a difference to some code.
2005
4dd4cc14
DL
2006** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2007operates on the minibuffer.
2008
7c94ccf6
EZ
2009** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2010cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2011different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2012(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2013Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2014character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2015multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2016encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2017reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2018sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2019a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2020the buffer as multibyte characters.
2021
2022Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2023MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2024appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2025
01242779 2026\f
ce75fd23
GM
2027* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2028(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2029
52d89894
GM
2030+++
2031** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2032alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2033
693c4692 2034** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2035
1c14ba45 2036+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2037** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2038deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2039being deleted.
2040
1c14ba45 2041+++
39e776cd
SM
2042** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2043
a18a342d 2044+++
1396138a 2045** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2046If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2047skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2048with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2049C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2050charset.
2051
4fbdfdcf
MB
2052+++
2053** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2054the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2055message.
2056
6a0b0752
MB
2057** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2058expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2059
1c14ba45 2060+++
47e351a3
GM
2061** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2062with the more general `:mask' property.
2063
1c14ba45 2064+++
ba9eeda1
GM
2065** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
2066
a2bd77b8
GM
2067** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2068backslash.
2069
424d8b44
DL
2070+++
2071** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2072is running in batch mode. For example,
2073
2074 (message "%s" (read t))
2075
2076will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2077to standard output.
2078
2079+++
2080** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2081`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2082
ead53494
GM
2083** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2084will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2085frame or window.
2086
f6499c03 2087+++
27848c01
GM
2088** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2089were added
2090
2091- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2092
2093Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2094a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2095
2096- Function: remq ELT LIST
2097
2098Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2099comparison is done with `eq'.
2100
1c14ba45 2101+++
27848c01 2102** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2103
b548072f
GM
2104** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2105has been changed.
2106
424d8b44 2107+++
07b14857
KH
2108** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2109without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2110convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2111
1c14ba45 2112+++
9662da0b
GM
2113** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2114or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2115
7fce7efb
DL
2116** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2117function was declared obsolete.
2118
1c14ba45 2119+++
5d94f558 2120** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2121retained as an alias).
2122
f98d3086
SM
2123** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2124It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2125is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2126
87efd256
GM
2127** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2128
39b39373
GM
2129- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2130
2131Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2132omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2133the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2134even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2135minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2136means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2137
67c9a1d2
GM
2138** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2139
2140- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2141
2142Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2143
2144This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2145calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2146argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2147value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2148returned.
2149
2150Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2151if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2152it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2153minibuffer even if it is active.
2154
2155Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2156counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2157too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2158and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2159`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2160entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2161
2162ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2163ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2164ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2165ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2166ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2167If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2168Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2169
ead53494
GM
2170** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2171event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2172argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2173
25fa6deb
GM
2174** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2175call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2176message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2177Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2178
5d94f558 2179** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2180meaning no limit.
2181
5d94f558 2182** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2183coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2184DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2185
9b2999d0
DL
2186+++
2187** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2188list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2189
c286608e
SM
2190** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2191
9b2999d0 2192+++
80c05bd3
DL
2193** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2194buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2195This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2196than replacing the local map.
2197
4bc7a543
DL
2198** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2199after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2200
2201** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2202
f6499c03 2203+++
c286608e
SM
2204** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2205as promised long ago.
f0298744 2206
5d94f558 2207** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2208\f
2209* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2210
2211Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2212--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2213When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2214so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2215
85c75536
MB
2216*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2217buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2218the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2219restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2220
0b8a3a6d
DL
2221*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2222`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2223when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2224multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2225
2226*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2227`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2228contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2229
2230*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2231changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2232[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2233regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2234the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2235extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2236bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2237eight-bit-graphic.
2238
2239** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2240
2241A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2242a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2243character set as previously.
2244
2245*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2246They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2247modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2248
2249CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2250characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2251range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2252case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2253
2254FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2255name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2256
2257*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2258registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2259"fontset-default".
2260
2261*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2262argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2263
2264** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2265composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2266buffers and strings.
2267
2268*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2269character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2270code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2271have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2272composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2273composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2274The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2275also been deleted.
2276
2277*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2278specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2279`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2280
2281*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2282MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2283composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2284may differ between buffer and string text.
2285
2286*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2287COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2288
2289*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2290directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2291Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2292`composition' from STRING.
2293
2294*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2295a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2296
2297*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2298obsolete.
2299
965bc065 2300** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2301`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2302for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2303U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2304
2305** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2306`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2307X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2308
2309+++
2310** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2311are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 23120xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2313
399da7e3 2314+++
f0124b4a
DL
2315** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2316that offset in the file before writing.
2317
f98d3086
SM
2318** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2319compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2320
612839b6
GM
2321** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2322`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2323from which the command was issued.
2324
2325** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2326`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2327`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2328additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2329operate on.
2330
271b4185
GM
2331** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2332to `window-buffer-height'.
2333
2334- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2335
2336Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2337The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2338lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2339
2340Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2341respectively.
2342
2343If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2344COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2345
2346The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2347obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2348on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2349
2350Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2351buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2352possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2353is currently displayed in some window.
2354
3c30cb6e
DL
2355** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2356argument function's results.
2357
62f20204
GM
2358** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2359signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2360
c0510d27 2361** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2362header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2363
2364** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2365ignores differences in case and text representation.
2366
2367** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2368cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2369as follows:
2370
2371 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2372 nil don't display a cursor
2373 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2374 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2375 others display a box cursor.
2376
9a0dd3dc
GM
2377** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2378an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2379defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2380set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2381
d7b511c4 2382** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2383specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2384the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2385text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2386
2387Example:
2388
2389 (string-to-syntax "()")
2390 => (4 . 41)
2391
1fa28578
GM
2392** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2393other than 10.
2394
2395*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2396INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2397
5d94f558 2398 #b1111
1fa28578 2399 => 15
5d94f558 2400 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2401 => -15
2402
2403*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2404
5d94f558 2405 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2406 => 438
2407
2408*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2409
5d94f558 2410 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2411 => 48815
2412
2413*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2414
5d94f558 2415 #2R-111
1fa28578 2416 => -7
5d94f558 2417 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2418 => 267
2419
3d4ff2dd 2420** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2421the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2422and isn't a string.
2423
3d4ff2dd
GM
2424** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2425a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2426value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2427not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2428
16ce590d
DL
2429+++
2430** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2431
73825616 2432** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2433for a regexp in a string.
2434
2435** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2436`mouse-position-function'.
2437
723e779c
GM
2438** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2439that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2440
d1e103b2
GM
2441** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2442Keywords are now always considered constants.
2443
31047e0d
DL
2444+++
2445** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2446returns it.
2447
7a85e4df
GM
2448** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2449returned by function `recent-keys'.
2450
02b14400
RS
2451+++
2452** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2453can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2454Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2455etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2456mode.
404fa7d6 2457
02b14400 2458+++
8964fec7
SM
2459** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2460and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2461
02b14400
RS
2462+++
2463** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2464has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2465function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2466returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2467been performed."
2468
2469When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2470and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2471hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2472then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2473
02b14400 2474+++
81da8b32
GM
2475** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2476In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2477and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2478
02b14400 2479+++
9e207b90
GM
2480** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2481with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2482specified table.
2483
2484 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2485
2486Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2487TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2488saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2489what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2490
02b14400 2491+++
d7f89643 2492** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2493Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2494Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2495corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2496Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2497
02b14400 2498+++
dde9e75a
GM
2499** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2500removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2501
02b14400 2502+++
9da30515
GM
2503** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2504instead of being optional.
2505
02b14400 2506+++
d20679eb
GM
2507** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2508modify read-only text.
2509
02b14400 2510+++
fbc164de
PE
2511** New functions and variables for locales.
2512
2513The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2514decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2515time functions like strftime. The new variables
2516`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2517locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2518
2519The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2520environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2521the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2522environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2523not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2524`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2525`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2526
02b14400 2527+++
863476d1
SM
2528** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2529To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2530modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2531start sequences.
2532
02b14400 2533+++
ef6d912c
GM
2534** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2535because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2536
02b14400 2537+++
a933dad1
DL
2538** New function `propertize'
2539
2540The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2541strings with text properties.
2542
2543- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2544
2545Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2546by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2547PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2548specified value of that property. Example:
2549
2550 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2551
2552+++
2553** push and pop macros.
2554
02b14400
RS
2555Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2556are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2557as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2558
2559(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2560(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2561 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2562
02b14400
RS
2563** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2564
6c7fd5aa
RS
2565Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2566are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2567
2568(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2569 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2570 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2571 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2572
2573(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2574 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2575 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2576 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2577
a933dad1
DL
2578+++
2579** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2580as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2581
2582[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2583[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2584[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2585[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2586[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2587 space, and DEL.
2588[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2589 and DEL.
2590[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2591 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2592 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2593[:alpha:] matches letters.
2594 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2595 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2596[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2597[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2598[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2599[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2600 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2601 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2602[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2603[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2604[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2605
2606+++
2607** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2608
2609The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2610
2611- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2612
2613The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2614are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2615
2616:test TEST
2617
2618TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2619Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2620it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2621
2622:size SIZE
2623
2624SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2625many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2626
2627:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2628
2629REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2630full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2631size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
26321.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2633old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2634
2635:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2636
2637THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2638hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2639(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2640
2641:weakness WEAK
2642
b548072f
GM
2643WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2644`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2645`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2646collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2647outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2648
2649- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2650
2651Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2652
2653- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2654
2655Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2656
2657- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2658
2659Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2660values are shared.
2661
2662- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2663
2664Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2665
2666- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2667
2668Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2669
2670- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2671
2672Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2673
2674- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2675
2676Returns the size of TABLE.
2677
d96d6bb0 2678- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2679
2680Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2681
2682- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2683
2684Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2685
2686- Function: clrhash TABLE
2687
2688Clear TABLE.
2689
2690- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2691
2692Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2693not found.
2694
79214ddf 2695- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2696
2697Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2698another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2699
2700- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2701
2702Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2703
2704- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2705
2706Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2707arguments KEY and VALUE.
2708
2709- Function: sxhash OBJ
2710
2711Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2712
2713- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2714
2715Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2716a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2717comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2718and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2719of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2720
2721TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2722
2723HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2724code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2725integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2726
2727Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2728be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2729
2730 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2731 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2732
2733 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2734 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2735
79214ddf 2736 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2737 'case-fold-string-hash))
2738
2739 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2740
2741+++
2742** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2743
2744It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2745circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2746a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2747
2748+++
2749** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2750
2751If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2752#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2753
a933dad1
DL
2754+++
2755** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2756t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2757specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2758is too short to reach that column.
2759
2760+++
2761** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2762now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2763after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2764two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2765
2766If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2767perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2768and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2769
2770+++
2771** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2772to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2773
2774+++
2775** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2776calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2777
2778+++
2779** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2780directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2781small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2782small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2783temporary-file-directory instead.
2784
2785+++
2786** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2787the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2788`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2789hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2790
2791+++
2792** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2793elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2794
2795+++
2796** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2797
2798make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2799creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2800ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2801
2802+++
2803** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2804
2805The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2806on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2807is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2808never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2809ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2810overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2811
2812If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2813that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2814to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2815The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2816
2817+++
2818** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2819
2820Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2821If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2822ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2823result string.
2824
2825Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2826string where arguments appear in the result string.
2827
2828Example:
2829
2830 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2831 (s2 "world"))
2832 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2833 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2834 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2835
2836results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2837
2838+++
2839** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2840
2841Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2842The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2843argument in it.
2844
2845 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2846 (arg "world"))
2847 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2848 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2849 (message msg arg))
2850
2851+++
2852** Sound support
2853
2854Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2855(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2856
2857Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2858(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2859to enable sound support.
2860
2861Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2862list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2863when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2864functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2865sound to play, before playing the sound.
2866
2867The following sound properties are supported:
2868
2869- `:file FILE'
2870
2871FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2872searched relative to `data-directory'.
2873
6fb40beb
GM
2874- `:data DATA'
2875
2876DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2877may be present, but not both.
2878
a933dad1
DL
2879- `:volume VOLUME'
2880
2881VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
28820..1. This property is optional.
2883
01242779
DL
2884- `:device DEVICE'
2885
2886DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
2887sound. The default device is system-dependent.
2888
a933dad1
DL
2889Other properties are ignored.
2890
01242779
DL
2891An alternative interface is called as
2892(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
2893
a933dad1 2894** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 2895
9b2999d0 2896+++
356673d4
DL
2897** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2898a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2899
2900** Changes to garbage collection
2901
2902*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2903of live and free strings.
2904
2905*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2906strings that have been consed so far.
2907
a933dad1 2908\f
04545643
GM
2909* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2910Lisp Manual
2911
f7eb32aa 2912+++
a299a6f0
GM
2913** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2914mini-windows.
2915
9b2999d0 2916+++
a299a6f0 2917** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third argument, FULLY.
ea4c1b7c
MB
2918If FULLY is non-nil, then locations that are partially obscured aren't
2919considered visible.
2920
a299a6f0 2921** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 2922
9a8d84ca
DL
2923+++
2924** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 2925
9b2999d0 2926+++
2c69ced2
GM
2927** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2928image.
2929
2930- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2931
2932Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2933
2934SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2935measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2936character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2937font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2938FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2939
9b2999d0 2940+++
ebb8f116
GM
2941** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2942has a mask bitmap.
2943
2944- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2945
2946Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2947FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2948or omitted means use the selected frame.
2949
f6499c03 2950+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2951** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2952satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2953
2954+++
2955** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2956optional.
2957
f6499c03
DL
2958+++
2959** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2960below).
04545643
GM
2961
2962\f
a933dad1
DL
2963* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2964
2965Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2966--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2967When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2968so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2969
f6d3257b
GM
2970** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2971to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2972
2973Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2974text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2975is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2976your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2977laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2978just display it black instead.
2979
2980This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2981a line like
2982
2983 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2984
2985in your `.emacs'.
2986
a933dad1
DL
2987** New face implementation.
2988
2989Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2990font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2991
2992+++
2993*** New faces.
2994
2995Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2996
2997 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2998
a933dad1
DL
2999 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3000 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 3001
a933dad1 3002 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 3003
a933dad1 3004 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 3005
a933dad1 3006 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 3007
a933dad1 3008 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 3009
a933dad1
DL
3010 7. Background color.
3011
3012 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3013
3014 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3015
3016 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3017
3018 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3019
3020 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3021 color.
3022
3023 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3024 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3025
3026Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3027same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3028frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3029faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3030with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
3031attributes mentioned above.
3032
3033There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3034definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3035created frames.
79214ddf 3036
a933dad1
DL
3037A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3038have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3039`fully-specified'.
3040
3041+++
3042*** Face merging.
3043
3044The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3045combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3046aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3047properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3048that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3049results in a fully-specified face.
3050
3051+++
3052*** Face realization.
3053
3054After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3055merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3056realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3057available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3058face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3059cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3060
3061Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3062character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3063for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3064charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3065
3066Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3067specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3068being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3069the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3070statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3071
3072In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3073`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
30740x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3075the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3076initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3077Emacs.
3078
3079Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3080`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3081registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3082with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3083
a7c13351 3084+++
a933dad1
DL
3085**** Clearing face caches.
3086
3087The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3088on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3089unused fonts.
3090
3091+++
3092*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3093
a933dad1
DL
3094Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3095given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3096for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3097
3098If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3099pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3100family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3101property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3102an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3103
3104Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3105against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3106match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3107
3108Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3109
3110The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3111attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3112face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3113names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3114that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3115width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3116to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3117
52d89894
GM
3118Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3119alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
3120doesn't exist. Likewise, `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows to
3121specify alternative font registry names to try.
a933dad1
DL
3122
3123+++
3124**** Scalable fonts
3125
3126Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3127since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3128servers.
3129
3130To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3131`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3132scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3133Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3134scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3135that list. Example:
3136
3137 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3138
3139allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3140
3141+++
3142*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3143
3144- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3145
3146Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3147is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3148string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3149
3150If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3151the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3152FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3153POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3154SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3155These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3156if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3157REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3158the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3159of the face font sort order.
3160
79214ddf 3161- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3162
3163Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3164omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3165(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3166non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3167
3168- Variable: font-list-limit
3169
3170Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3171won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3172matching font. The default is currently 100.
3173
3174+++
3175*** Setting face attributes.
3176
3177For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3178with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3179implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3180`face-attribute'.
3181
3182Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3183symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3184
3185The following attributes are recognized:
3186
3187`:family'
3188
3189VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3190or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3191and `?' are allowed.
3192
3193`:width'
3194
3195VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3196It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3197`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3198`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3199
3200`:height'
3201
787345ff
MB
3202VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3203in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3204scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3205height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3206
3207`:weight'
3208
3209VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3210symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3211`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3212
3213`:slant'
3214
3215VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3216symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3217`reverse-oblique'.
3218
3219`:foreground', `:background'
3220
3221VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3222
3223`:underline'
3224
3225VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3226VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3227a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3228don't underline.
3229
3230`:overline'
3231
3232VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3233VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3234string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3235overline.
3236
3237`:strike-through'
3238
3239VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3240striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3241face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3242is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3243
3244`:box'
3245
3246VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3247around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3248VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3249of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3250and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3251VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3252:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3253the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3254specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3255defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3256the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3257color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3258should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3259like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3260that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3261the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3262box.
3263
3264`:inverse-video'
3265
3266VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3267inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3268
3269`:stipple'
3270
3271If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3272The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3273searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3274HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3275is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3276explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3277
3278For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3279and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3280
3281`:font'
3282
3283Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3284XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3285is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3286versions of Emacs.
3287
3288For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3289be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3290must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3291
3292Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3293`defface'.
3294
787345ff
MB
3295`:inherit'
3296
3297VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3298of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3299like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3300
a933dad1
DL
3301*** Face attributes and X resources
3302
3303The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3304from X resources:
3305
3306 Face attribute X resource class
3307-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3308 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3309 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3310 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3311 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3312 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3313 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3314 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3315 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3316 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3317 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3318 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3319 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3320 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3321 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3322 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3323 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3324 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3325 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3326 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3327
3328+++
3329*** Text property `face'.
3330
3331The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3332specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3333specification can be
3334
33351. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3336
33372. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3338 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3339 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3340 for face attribute names.
3341
33423. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3343 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3344 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3345
3346+++
3347** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3348
acf3ecb7
EZ
3349The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3350on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3351the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3352default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3353`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3354used to clear the mapping table.
3355
acf3ecb7
EZ
3356** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3357
3358The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3359and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3360type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3361color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3362display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3363old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3364`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3365compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3366should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3367modify their color-related behavior.
3368
3369The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3370any frame type.
3371
8a5719f0
EZ
3372** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3373
3374The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3375`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3376`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3377`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3378`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3379`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3380display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3381the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3382platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3383
a933dad1
DL
3384+++
3385** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3386
463cac2d 3387This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3388To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3389the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3390`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3391
3392The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3393end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3394Otherwise, it returns zero.
3395
463cac2d
GM
3396** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3397
3398There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3399buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3400property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3401
9a9dfda8 3402Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3403forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3404to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3405not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3406commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3407boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3408`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3409functions.
463cac2d
GM
3410
3411Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3412a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3413editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3414
9a9dfda8
GM
3415The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3416
59927f88 3417- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3418
3419Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3420
9a9dfda8
GM
3421A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3422If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3423constrained position if that is is different.
3424
3425If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3426positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3427ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3428constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3429as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3430is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3431fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3432the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3433also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3434
3435If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3436NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3437unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3438C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3439only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3440
59927f88
MB
3441If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3442a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3443
3444Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3445
3446- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3447
59927f88 3448Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3449A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3450If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3451
3452- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3453
3454Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3455A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3456If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3457If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3458field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3459
3460- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3461
3462Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3463A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3464If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3465If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3466then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3467
3468- Function: field-string &optional POS
3469
3470Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3471A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3472If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3473
3474- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3475
3476Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3477A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3478If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3479
a933dad1
DL
3480+++
3481** Image support.
3482
3483Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3484strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3485(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3486replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3487
3488If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3489`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3490AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3491window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3492area.
3493
3494IMAGE is an image specification.
3495
3496*** Image specifications
3497
3498Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3499is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3500specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3501symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3502described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3503
3504The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3505
3506`:ascent ASCENT'
3507
576da55d
GM
3508ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3509If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3510to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3511
3512If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3513image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3514
5d94f558 3515If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3516centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3517of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3518overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3519
3520`:margin MARGIN'
3521
79214ddf 3522MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3523margin around the image. Default is 0.
3524
3525`:relief RELIEF'
3526
3527RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3528around an image.
3529
3530`:algorithm ALGO'
3531
47e351a3
GM
3532Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3533
3534ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3535edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3536
3537ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3538apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3539nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3540position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3541around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3542neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3543transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3544x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3545below.
3546
3547 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3548 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3549 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3550
3551The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3552resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3553multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3554of the factors' absolute values.
3555
327652be 3556Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3557
47e351a3
GM
3558 (1 0 0
3559 0 0 0
3560 9 9 -1)
3561
3562Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3563
3564 ( 2 -1 0
3565 -1 0 1
3566 0 1 -2)
3567
ba9eeda1
GM
3568ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3569``disabled''.
3570
47e351a3
GM
3571`:mask MASK'
3572
3573If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3574the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3575image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3576background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3577image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3578the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3579GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3580image.
a933dad1 3581
47e351a3
GM
3582If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3583in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3584`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3585
3586`:file FILE'
3587
3588Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3589search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3590building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3591may be present in the image specification.
3592
518df5c4
GM
3593`:data DATA'
3594
3595Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3596supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3597present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3598support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3599
a933dad1
DL
3600*** Supported image types
3601
b246b1f6 3602**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3603
3604XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3605properties supported are
3606
3607`:foreground FG'
3608
3609FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3610is the frame's foreground.
3611
46c5af7f 3612`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3613
3614BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3615the frame's background color.
3616
3617XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3618case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3619instead of a `:file' property.
3620
3621`:width WIDTH'
3622
3623WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3624
3625`:height HEIGHT'
3626
3627HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3628
3629`:data DATA'
3630
3631DATA must be either
3632
3633 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3634 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3635
3636 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3637
3638 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3639 bitmap.
3640
c76e04a8
GM
3641 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3642 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3643 in the file.
3644
a933dad1
DL
3645**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3646
3647XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3648`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3649found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3650`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3651
3652Additional image properties supported are:
3653
3654`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3655
3656SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3657name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3658name.
3659
3660XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3661add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3662
a933dad1
DL
3663The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3664to display compressed images.
3665
3666**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3667
3668PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3669mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3670mono images are
3671
3672`:foreground FG'
3673
3674FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3675is the frame's foreground.
3676
3677`:background FG'
3678
3679BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3680the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3681
3682**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3683
3684Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3685package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3686are:
3687
a933dad1
DL
3688**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3689
3690Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3691package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3692properties defined.
3693
3694**** GIF, image type `gif'
3695
3696Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3697`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3698
3699Additional image properties supported are:
3700
3701`:index INDEX'
3702
3703INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3704multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3705
3706This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3707For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3708at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3709every 0.1 seconds.
3710
3711(defun show-anim (file max)
3712 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3713 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3714
3715(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3716 (when (= idx max)
3717 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3718 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3719 (save-excursion
3720 (set-buffer buffer)
3721 (goto-char (point-min))
3722 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3723 (insert-image img "x"))
3724 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3725
3726**** PNG, image type `png'
3727
3728Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3729package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3730properties defined.
3731
3732**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3733
3734Additional image properties supported are:
3735
3736`:pt-width WIDTH'
3737
3738WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3739integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3740
3741`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3742
3743HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3744must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3745
3746`:bounding-box BOX'
3747
3748BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3749the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3750files. This is an required property.
3751
3752Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3753lisp/gs.el.
3754
3755*** Lisp interface.
3756
79214ddf
FP
3757The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3758which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3759
3760Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3761they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3762The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3763manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3764images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3765
3766*** Simplified image API, image.el
3767
3768The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3769creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3770can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3771define an image based on available image types. The functions
3772`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3773buffer.
3774
3775+++
3776** Display margins.
3777
3778Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3779and images.
3780
3781To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3782`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3783`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3784obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3785`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3786the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3787of the display margins.
3788
3789You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3790containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3791one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3792string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3793in this file).
3794
3795+++
3796** Help display
3797
3798Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3799moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3800`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3801that have a `help-echo' property.
3802
9662da0b 3803If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3804is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3805the window in which the help was found.
3806
3807If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3808`help-echo' text property was found.
3809
3810If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3811POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3812
3813If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3814the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3815mouse.
d5aa31d8 3816
9662da0b
GM
3817If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3818string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3819
3820For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3821determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3822property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3823For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3824used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3825
3826The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3827the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3828causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3829
3830+++
3831** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3832
3833The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3834This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3835
3836The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3837scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3838The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3839scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3840used.
3841
79214ddf
FP
3842 (global-set-key [A-down]
3843 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3844 (interactive)
79214ddf 3845 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3846 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3847 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3848 #'(lambda ()
3849 (interactive)
79214ddf 3850 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3851 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3852
3853+++
3854** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3855
3856Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3857when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3858variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3859is called with one argument, POS.
3860
3861At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3862characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3863as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3864property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3865`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3866
3867+++
3868** Tool bar support.
3869
3870Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3871parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3872controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3873suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3874`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3875automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3876
3877*** Tool bar item definitions
3878
3879Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3880`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3881where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3882
a933dad1
DL
3883CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3884evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3885the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3886property (see below).
79214ddf 3887
a933dad1
DL
3888BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3889binding are currently ignored.
3890
3891The following properties are recognized:
3892
3893`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3894
a933dad1
DL
3895FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3896or disabled.
79214ddf 3897
a933dad1 3898`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3899
a933dad1 3900FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3901
a933dad1
DL
3902`:filter FUNCTION'
3903
3904FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3905FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3906used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3907
a933dad1
DL
3908`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3909
3910TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3911and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3912
a933dad1
DL
3913`:image IMAGES'
3914
3915IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3916image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3917meaning of each of the four elements:
3918
3919 Index Use when item is
3920 ----------------------------------------
3921 0 enabled and selected
3922 1 enabled and deselected
3923 2 disabled and selected
3924 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3925
4ba7246d
GM
3926If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3927algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3928
a933dad1 3929`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3930
a933dad1
DL
3931Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3932is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3933
dab96841 3934The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3935toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3936to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3937menu bar.
dab96841 3938
8628686a
DL
3939The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
3940dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
3941buffer-locally to override the global map.
3942
a933dad1
DL
3943*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3944
3945If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3946resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3947than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3948
79214ddf 3949If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3950raised when the mouse moves over them.
3951
3952You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3953`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3954pixels. Default is 1.
3955
3956You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3957`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3958
3959*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3960
3961You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3962a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3963
3964 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3965 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3966 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3967
3968is the original tool bar item definition, then
3969
3970 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3971
3972makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3973item.
3974
3975** Mode line changes.
3976
3977+++
3978*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3979
3980The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3981that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3982a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3983
39841. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3985a `local-map' text property.
3986
39872. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3988that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3989
39903. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3991is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3992`local-map' property.
3993
3994The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3995properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3996example.
3997
54522c9f
GM
3998*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3999evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4000
a933dad1
DL
4001+++
4002*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4003variable mode-line-format to nil.
4004
4005+++
4006*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4007
4008This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4009`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4010completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4011`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4012line.
4013
4014The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4015`header-line'.
4016
4017The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4018position in the header-line.
4019
4020+++
4021** Text property `display'
4022
623a0aae
GM
4023The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4024replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4025also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4026the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4027below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4028
623a0aae
GM
4029*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4030
4031To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4032text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4033
4034If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4035marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4036the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4037is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4038simpler form STRING as property value.
4039
a933dad1
DL
4040*** Variable width and height spaces
4041
4042To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4043specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4044`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4045area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4046marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4047displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4048simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4049
4050The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4051PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4052properties described below.
4053
4054The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4055characters having the `display' property.
4056
4057- :width WIDTH
4058
4059Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4060character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4061
4062- :relative-width FACTOR
4063
4064Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4065first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4066same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4067width of that character by FACTOR.
4068
4069- :align-to HPOS
4070
4071Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4072value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4073
4074Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4075
4076- :height HEIGHT
4077
4078Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4079normal line height.
4080
4081- :relative-height FACTOR
4082
4083The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4084of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4085
4086- :ascent ASCENT
4087
4088Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4089used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4090baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4091equal to 100.
4092
4093You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4094
4095*** Images
4096
4097A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4098. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4099in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4100their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4101the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4102`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4103area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4104the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4105as display specification.
4106
4107*** Other display properties
4108
c9e73000 4109- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4110
4111Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4112should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4113integer or float.
4114
c9e73000 4115- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4116
4117Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4118
4119If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4120means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4121the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4122``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4123a font is available counts as a step.
4124
4125If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4126as tall as the frame's default font.
4127
4128If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4129height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4130
4131Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4132`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4133
c9e73000 4134- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4135
4136FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4137font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4138raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4139amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4140`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4141
4142*** Conditional display properties
4143
4144All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4145has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4146applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4147During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4148the text having the `display' property.
4149
4150The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4151`(:when t SPEC)'.
4152
4153+++
4154** New menu separator types.
4155
4156Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4157item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4158treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4159to specify other menu separator types.
4160
4161- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4162
4163No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4164separator occurs.
4165
4166- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4167
4168A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4169
4170- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4171
4172A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4173
4174- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4175
4176A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4177
4178- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4179
4180A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4181
4182- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4183
4184A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4185displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4186
4187- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4188
4189A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4190
4191- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4192
4193A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4194
4195- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4196
4197A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4198
4199- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4200
4201Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4202
4203- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4204
4205Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4206
4207- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4208
4209Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4210
4211- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4212
4213Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4214
4215Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4216the corresponding single-line separators.
4217
4218+++
4219** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4220
4221The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4222`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4223Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4224that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4225default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4226default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4227default foreground is black.
4228
4229The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4230(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4231`ScrollBarBackground').
4232
4233Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4234settings for scroll bar colors.
4235
4236+++
4237** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4238display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4239
4240---
4241** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4242starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4243on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4244line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4245the original window start.
4246
4247---
4248** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4249`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4250now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4251
4252+++
4253** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4254
4255A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4256`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4257windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4258other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4259
4260The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4261fixed-width and fixed-height.
4262
4263 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4264
4265A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4266fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4267window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4268change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4269temporarily to nil, for example
4270
4271 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4272 (enlarge-window 10))
4273
79214ddf 4274Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4275or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4276
4277** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4278terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4279to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4280overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4281horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4282support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4283
3787e12e 4284
79dfd2cd 4285\f
3787e12e
GM
4286* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4287
4288** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4289input.
4290
4291** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4292
4293** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4294
4295** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4296only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4297exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4298(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4299(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4300
4301** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4302been added.
4303
79dfd2cd 4304\f
3787e12e
GM
4305* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4306
4307** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4308
79dfd2cd 4309\f
3787e12e
GM
4310* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4311
4312** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4313M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4314\f
4315* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4316
4317** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4318
4319You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4320Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4321`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4322
4323If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4324is the one that is used.
4325
4326** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4327the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4328Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4329separate from the command's regular output.
4330Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4331says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4332In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4333the buffer name.
4334
4335When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4336output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4337it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4338cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4339
4340** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4341the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4342is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4343created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4344
4345** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4346example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4347match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4348quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4349
4350** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4351now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4352if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4353they never ignore case.
4354
4355** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4356under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4357applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4358of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4359just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4360convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4361part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4362
4363If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4364the same format that was used in the file before.
4365
4366You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4367`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4368
4369** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4370renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4371This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4372
4373** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4374The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4375buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4376your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4377is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4378end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4379Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4380
4381The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4382eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4383control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4384format. You can now customize these variables.
4385
4386** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4387filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4388filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4389enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4390
4391** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4392in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4393windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4394
4395** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4396dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4397doesn't have any effect.
4398
4399** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4400not one per buffer.
4401
4402** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4403use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4404 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4405
4406** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4407To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4408`auto-show-mode' command.
4409
4410** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4411avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4412versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4413choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4414occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4415
4416** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4417cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4418
4419** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4420character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4421feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4422
4423** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4424the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4425interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4426and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4427
4428** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4429
4430The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4431that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4432one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4433codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4434set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4435
4436Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4437from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4438
4439IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4440equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4441a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4442`?' on other systems.
4443
4444IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4445feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4446Unix.
4447
4448Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4449current codepage when it starts.
4450
4451** Mail changes
4452
4453*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4454`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4455appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4456non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4457MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4458headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4459latin-1:
4460
4461 MIME-version: 1.0
4462 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4463 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4464
4465*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4466default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4467default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4468sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4469buffer-file-coding-system.
4470
4471You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4472sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4473mail.
4474
4475*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4476if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4477Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4478list of possible coding systems.
4479
4480** CC Mode changes
4481
4482*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4483modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4484longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4485docstring for details.
4486
4487*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4488symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4489found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4490prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4491lineup functions use this feature currently.
4492
4493*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4494"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4495
4496*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4497"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4498
4499*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4500from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4501symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4502c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4503anonymous classes.
4504
4505*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4506syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4507
4508*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4509inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4510support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4511function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4512
4513*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4514(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4515brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4516c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4517(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4518
4519*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4520
4521*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4522
4523*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4524for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4525
4526*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4527
4528*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4529associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4530This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4531circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4532class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4533
4534** Gnus changes.
4535
4536*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4537added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4538Gnus manual for the full story.
4539
4540*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4541before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4542group, which is created automatically.
4543
4544*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4545values.
4546
4547*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4548
4549*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4550outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4551
4552*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4553`C-u C-c C-c'.
4554
4555*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4556
4557*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4558re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4559
4560*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4561
4562*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4563Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4564
4565*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4566`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4567
4568*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4569control over simplification.
4570
4571*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4572
4573*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4574limit.
4575
4576*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4577
4578*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4579
4580*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4581If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4582rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4583
4584*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4585`a' forces normal posting method.
4586
4587*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4588-- `W d'.
4589
4590*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4591to a non-nil value.
4592
4593*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4594where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4595
4596*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4597has been added.
4598
4599*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4600
4601*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4602
4603*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4604`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4605
4606*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4607`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4608
4609*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4610
4611*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4612been added.
4613
4614*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4615`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4616
4617*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4618updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4619
4620*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4621
4622*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4623
4624*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4625
4626** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4627
4628*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4629options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4630nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4631
4632*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4633TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4634of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4635TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4636can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4637
4638*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4639All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4640but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4641the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4642
4643*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4644the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4645buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4646mismatch.
4647
4648** Changes to RefTeX mode
4649
4650*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4651file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4652
4653*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4654lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4655characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4656removed from the label.
4657
4658*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4659a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4660
4661*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4662customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4663
4664*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4665`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4666expressions.
4667
4668*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4669
4670** New/deleted modes and packages
4671
4672*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4673SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4674
4675*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4676editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4677SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4678
4679*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4680changes with a special face.
4681
4682*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4683this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4684Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4685\f
4686* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4687
4688** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4689This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4690conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4691and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4692check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4693
4694The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4695Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4696distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4697
4698** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4699MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4700controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4701directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4702Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4703on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4704string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4705program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4706printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4707
4708** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4709output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4710available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4711input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4712temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4713program.
4714
4715An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4716and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4717programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4718automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4719as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4720ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4721
4722** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4723a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4724MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4725was not documented clearly before.
4726
4727** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4728This includes Tetris and Snake.
4729\f
4730* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4731
4732** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4733return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4734They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4735meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4736
4737** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4738WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4739and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4740
4741** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4742
4743*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4744It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4745
4746*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4747the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4748integers.
4749
4750** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4751files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4752arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4753file names and attributes are returned.
4754
4755** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4756sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4757accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4758It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4759returns the result.
4760
4761** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4762to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4763
4764** New functions for base64 conversion:
4765
4766The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4767into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4768performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4769optionally.
4770
4771Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4772job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4773
4774**
4775The new function process-running-child-p
4776will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4777terminal to its own child process.
4778
4779** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4780when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4781to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4782itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4783
4784** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4785be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4786
4787** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4788:included is an alias for :visible.
4789
4790easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4791easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4792to move or copy menu entries.
4793
4794** Multibyte editing changes
4795
4796*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4797an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4798make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4799work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4800char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4801 (setq char (sref str idx)
4802 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4803The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4804
4805If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4806(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4807 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4808
4809*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4810region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4811deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4812
4813 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4814
4815This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4816across the boundary.
4817
4818*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4819`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4820 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4821 contains 8-bit characters.
4822 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4823 contains invalid characters.
4824
4825*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4826text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4827preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4828text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4829way.
4830
4831*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4832If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4833end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4834prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4835
4836*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4837compose Thai characters in a string.
4838
4839** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4840argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4841for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4842menus should always use the third argument.
4843
4844** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4845read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4846arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4847input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4848
4849** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4850of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4851programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4852inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4853
4854** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4855the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4856returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4857echo area contents.
4858
4859 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4860
4861** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4862NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4863requested feature cannot be loaded.
4864
4865** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4866foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4867means to clear out that attribute.
4868
4869** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4870gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4871
4872** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4873read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4874unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4875end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4876
4877** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4878the gap of the current buffer.
4879
4880** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4881to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4882current buffer.
4883
4884** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4885facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4886These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4887it back in after any modifications have been made.
4888\f
4889* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4890
4891** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4892the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4893/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4894directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4895subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4896
4897Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4898names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4899Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4900which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4901these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4902
4903Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4904starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4905time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4906
4907This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4908Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4909to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4910subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4911`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4912results.
4913
4914** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4915GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4916that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4917fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4918\f
4919* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4920
4921** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4922including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4923it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4924perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4925
4926** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4927specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4928region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4929further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4930command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4931within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4932are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4933region.
4934
4935In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4936selective undo.
4937
4938** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4939unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4940buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4941effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4942Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4943
4944The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4945though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4946-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4947load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4948
4949** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4950no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4951enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4952something that most users not do.
4953
4954** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4955operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4956The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4957applications.
4958
4959C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4960pasting operations.
4961
4962** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4963setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4964like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4965printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4966`ps-printer-name'.
4967
4968** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4969minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4970any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4971except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4972incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4973hits a new word.
4974
4975Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4976Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4977to be confused by TeX commands.
4978
4979You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4980correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4981clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4982of various alternative replacements and actions.
4983
4984Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4985the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4986corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4987alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4988flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4989
4990Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4991flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4992
4993** Changes in input method usage.
4994
4995Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4996the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4997respectively.
4998
4999You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5000
5001If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5002of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5003
5004The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5005that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5006
5007 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5008
5009 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5010
5011 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5012 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5013
5014 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5015 given in the following case:
5016 o When you are using a complex input method.
5017 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5018
5019If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5020input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5021and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5022setting it to t is helpful.
5023
5024The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5025
5026In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5027keys:
5028 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5029 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5030 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5031These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5032environment.
5033
5034** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5035names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5036minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5037get
5038
5039 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5040
5041which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5042
5043Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5044Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5045
5046** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5047at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5048its owner and group.
5049
5050** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5051Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5052
5053** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5054contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5055
5056** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5057which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5058in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5059by the left edge of the rectangle.
5060
5061** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5062increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5063C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5064for writing keyboard macros.
5065
5066** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5067files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5068frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5069the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5070additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5071info.
5072
5073** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5074
5075** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5076query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5077contents only.
5078
5079** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5080confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5081the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5082says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5083
5084** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5085non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5086literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5087
5088** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5089now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5090Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5091inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5092
5093** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5094failure if the command produces no output.
5095
5096** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5097manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5098the mouse.
5099
5100** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5101mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5102function and variable names.
5103
5104** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5105reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5106file-coding-system-alist.
5107
5108** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5109t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5110converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5111the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5112according to the current fontset.
5113
5114** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5115
5116The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5117that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5118nonascii-insert-offset.
5119
5120For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5121enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5122nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5123characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5124
5125** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5126an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5127
5128** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5129letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5130
5131** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5132are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5133command keys.
5134
5135** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5136user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5137
5138Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5139user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5140all variables that have documentation.
5141
5142** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5143shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5144that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5145minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5146it should show; the default is 20.
5147
5148Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5149the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5150of your input.
5151
5152** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5153all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5154recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5155argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5156the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5157Newly added options are included as well.
5158
5159If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5160then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5161for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5162
5163This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5164Customize menu.
5165
5166** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5167the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5168
5169** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5170buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5171invoked.
5172
5173** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5174that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5175The default is 1.
5176
5177** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5178syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5179new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5180(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5181sensibly.
5182
5183** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5184
5185** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5186value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5187two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5188
5189** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5190reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5191for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5192every night.
5193
5194** Desktop changes
5195
5196*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5197the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5198
5199*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5200and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5201
5202** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5203read and post multi-lingual articles.
5204
5205** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5206doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5207be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5208outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5209the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5210made invisible again.
5211
5212** Mail reading and sending changes
5213
5214*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5215the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5216changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5217toggle.
5218
5219*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5220now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5221summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5222the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5223rmail-default-body-file.
5224
5225*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5226longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5227handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5228
5229*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5230it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5231is evaluated to insert the signature.
5232
5233*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5234outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5235handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5236putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5237transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5238especially interested in trying feedmail.
5239
5240feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5241feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5242provided by feedmail are:
5243
5244**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5245stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5246there is also a queue for draft messages
5247
5248**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5249be prompted for confirmation
5250
5251**** does smart filling of address headers
5252
5253**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5254the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5255can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5256
5257**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5258the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5259/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5260function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5261
5262** Dired changes
5263
5264*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5265files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5266
5267*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5268run Dired on the directory name at point.
5269
5270*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5271files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5272for a specified regexp.
5273
5274** VC Changes
5275
5276*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5277conveniently.
5278
5279*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5280faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5281Dired.
5282
5283VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5284directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5285listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5286currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5287
5288You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5289then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5290vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5291control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5292on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5293
5294All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5295is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5296`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5297the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5298`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5299
5300The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5301toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5302VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5303`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5304
5305Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5306ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5307command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5308
5309*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5310file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5311session to resolve them.
5312
5313Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5314resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5315contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5316uses as well).
5317
5318*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5319command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5320you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5321either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5322branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5323If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5324using ediff.
5325
5326** Changes in Font Lock
5327
5328*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5329are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5330use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5331unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5332compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5333
5334** Frame name display changes
5335
5336*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5337frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5338raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5339when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5340
5341*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5342frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5343menu.
5344
5345** Comint (subshell) changes
5346
5347*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5348subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5349with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5350
5351*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5352
5353C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5354that is, the line after the last line you got.
5355You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5356
5357C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5358send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5359the following line.
5360
5361C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5362which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5363previously sent input.
5364
5365C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5366it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5367as the search string.
5368
5369*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5370automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5371
5372** C mode changes
5373
5374*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5375and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5376assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5377definition.
5378
5379*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5380(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5381Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5382style is still the default however.
5383
5384*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5385
5386*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5387are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5388them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5389
5390*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5391and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5392
5393*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5394namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5395
5396*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5397makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5398
5399*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5400c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5401
5402*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5403should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5404package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5405variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5406
5407** Changes to hippie-expand.
5408
5409*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5410non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5411which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5412
5413*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5414non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5415expanding dynamically.
5416
5417*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5418non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5419
5420*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5421non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5422this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5423expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5424
5425*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5426
5427** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5428
5429*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5430bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5431automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5432bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5433against the first word in the title.
5434
5435*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5436capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5437bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5438lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5439lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5440bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5441
5442*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5443generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5444replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5445bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5446
5447** Changes in vcursor.el.
5448
5449*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5450and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5451variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5452entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5453`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5454in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5455
5456*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5457Editing group once the package is loaded.
5458
5459*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5460generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5461vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5462
5463*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5464vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5465
5466** Ispell changes.
5467
5468*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5469buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5470are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5471
5472*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5473A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5474and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5475defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5476include:
5477
5478 o URLs are automatically skipped
5479 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5480
5481*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5482
5483** Changes to RefTeX mode
5484
5485RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5486large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5487re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5488section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5489
5490*** New recursive parser.
5491
5492The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5493entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5494recursive parser scans the individual files.
5495
5496*** Parsing only part of a document.
5497
5498Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5499partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5500the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5501
5502 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5503
5504*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5505
5506This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5507
5508 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5509
5510*** Using multiple selection buffers
5511
5512If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5513for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5514
5515 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5516
5517*** References to external documents.
5518
5519The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5520documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5521documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5522macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5523RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5524the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5525The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5526
5527*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5528
5529The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5530and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5531
5532Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5533the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5534
5535*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5536
5537The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5538buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5539
5540*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5541
5542The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5543contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5544`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5545have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5546enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5547at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5548more.
5549
5550*** Support for the varioref package
5551
5552The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5553
5554*** New hooks
5555
5556Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5557and citations are created. These hooks are
5558`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5559`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5560
5561*** Citations outside LaTeX
5562
5563The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5564a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5565
5566*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5567
5568The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5569fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5570fontified, use
5571
5572 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5573
5574** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5575With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5576the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5577directories that contain the same file name.
5578
5579Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5580Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5581file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5582Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5583have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5584names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5585directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5586directory.
5587
5588** New modes and packages
5589
5590*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5591It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5592it, but some do not.
5593
5594*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5595code.
5596
5597*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5598current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5599around in a buffer.
5600
5601Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5602
5603*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5604uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5605be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5606established system of notation similar to Chess.
5607
5608*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5609documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5610guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5611
5612*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5613available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5614system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5615simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5616functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5617the like.
5618
5619*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5620identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5621
5622*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5623within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5624used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5625the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5626
5627*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5628
5629 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5630 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5631 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5632 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5633 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5634 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5635 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5636 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5637 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5638 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5639 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5640
5641 Platform-specific modes:
5642
5643 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5644 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5645 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5646 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5647 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5648 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5649 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5650 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5651 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5652\f
5653* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5654
5655** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5656use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5657That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5658Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5659
5660Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5661you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5662consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5663
5664** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5665and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5666specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5667searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5668
5669** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5670multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5671character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5672environment.
5673
5674** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5675take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5676string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5677current input method for reading this one event.
5678
5679** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5680now control whether to output certain characters as
5681backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5682non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5683characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5684in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5685\f
5686* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5687
5688** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5689of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5690
5691** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5692in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5693always increases point by 1.
5694
5695The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5696considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5697
5698See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5699
5700** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5701Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5702default value changed. For example,
5703
5704 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5705 :type 'integer
5706 :group 'foo
5707 :version "20.3")
5708
5709 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5710 :version "20.3")
5711
5712If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5713default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5714is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5715`:version' in the top level group.
5716
5717This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5718
5719** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5720starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5721
5722However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5723symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5724support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5725to themselves.
5726
5727If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5728this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5729values whatever.
5730
5731** There is a new debugger command, R.
5732It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5733in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5734
5735** Frame-local variables.
5736
5737You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5738the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5739local bindings for that variable.
5740
5741These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5742frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5743modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5744parameter name.
5745
5746Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5747Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5748active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5749that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5750
5751It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5752clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5753very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5754through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5755
5756** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5757"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5758evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5759makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5760See the documentation in sregex.el.
5761
5762** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5763is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5764parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5765The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5766
5767** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5768If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5769
5770** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5771known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5772define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5773
5774** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5775when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5776it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5777history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5778
5779The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5780return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5781empty input.
5782
5783** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5784for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5785`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5786Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5787`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5788
5789** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5790echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5791a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5792default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5793
5794** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5795specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5796function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5797place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5798non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5799
5800** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5801If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5802up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5803end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5804
5805** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5806which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5807If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5808
5809** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5810holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5811was directed to display this buffer.
5812
5813** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5814with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5815describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5816other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5817set-window-configuration.
5818
5819** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5820window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5821positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5822windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5823
5824** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5825override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5826look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5827
5828If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5829non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5830map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5831
5832minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5833and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5834
5835** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5836except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5837
5838** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5839USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5840floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5841
5842** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5843to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5844in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5845it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5846
5847** Menu changes
5848
5849*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5850keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5851better supported.
5852
5853The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5854a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5855you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5856can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5857then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5858
5859*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5860
5861In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5862 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5863defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5864starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5865
5866The format is:
5867 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5868 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5869where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5870string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5871The supported properties include
5872
5873:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5874 item is enabled.
5875:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5876 item should appear in the menu.
5877:filter FILTER-FN
5878 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5879 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5880 It should return a binding to use instead.
5881:keys DESCRIPTION
5882 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5883 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5884 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5885:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5886 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5887 keyboard binding.
5888:key-sequence nil
5889 This means that the command normally has no
5890 keyboard equivalent.
5891:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5892:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5893 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5894 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5895 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5896
5897Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5898Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5899
5900(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5901
5902** New event types
5903
5904*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5905mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5906corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5907which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5908
5909 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5910
5911where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5912same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5913indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5914negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5915the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5916forward, away from the user.
5917
5918As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5919
5920*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5921files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5922and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5923filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5924loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5925
5926 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5927
5928where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5929same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5930that were dragged and dropped.
5931
5932As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5933
5934** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5935
5936*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5937any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5938to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5939
5940*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5941can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5942that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5943
5944*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5945in Emacs 19 and before.
5946
5947The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5948The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5949
5950*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5951buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5952unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5953representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5954
5955This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5956as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5957viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5958one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5959will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5960
5961This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5962representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5963(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5964consistent with the new representation.
5965
5966*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5967representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5968about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5969however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5970
5971The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5972nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5973using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5974
5975*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5976representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5977representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5978
5979The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5980loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5981is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5982
5983*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5984which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5985
5986*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5987which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5988
5989*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5990portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5991so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5992You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5993
5994*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5995it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5996
5997*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5998convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5999buffer or string being searched.
6000
6001One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6002[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6003searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6004searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6005obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6006you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6007expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6008
6009*** Structure of coding system changed.
6010
6011All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6012by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6013which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6014as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6015vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6016your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6017define-coding-system-alias.
6018
6019The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6020the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6021access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6022pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6023character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6024safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6025'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6026`iso-8859-1'.
6027
6028Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6029The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6030coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6031(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6032
6033Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6034also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6035are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6036the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6037
6038*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6039proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6040This function requires a user interaction.
6041
6042*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6043find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6044select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6045systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6046a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6047select-safe-coding-system.
6048
6049*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6050decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6051last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6052was done.
6053
6054*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6055used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6056coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6057
6058*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6059return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6060characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6061`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6062
6063*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6064coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6065coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6066converted.
6067
6068*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6069coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6070
6071*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6072character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6073character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6074each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6075either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6076range of characters.
6077
6078*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6079Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6080
6081*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6082in the current buffer at position POS.
6083
6084*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6085input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6086function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6087character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6088event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6089binding input-method-function to nil.
6090
6091The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6092method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6093input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6094the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6095not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6096
6097The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6098subsequent events of a key sequence.
6099
6100*** You can customize any language environment by using
6101set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6102
6103The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6104customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6105instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6106environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6107exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6108\f
6109* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6110
6111** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6112options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6113at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6114tree structure.
6115
6116M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6117user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6118
6119With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6120session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6121in your .emacs file.)
6122
6123** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6124You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6125
6126** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6127This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6128
6129** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6130immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6131kills the region.
6132
6133The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6134delete the character before point, as usual.
6135
6136** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6137on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6138by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6139
6140** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6141insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6142the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6143onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6144history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6145past.)
6146
6147** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6148This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6149in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6150TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6151makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6152
6153As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6154and is an alias for it.
6155
6156If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6157use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6158
6159** Scrolling changes
6160
6161*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6162position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6163
6164In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6165on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6166where it started.
6167
6168*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6169move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6170screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6171does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6172
6173*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6174top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6175comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6176recenters the window.
6177
6178** International character set support (MULE)
6179
6180Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6181including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6182Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6183Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6184features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6185MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6186
6187Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6188coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6189character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6190variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6191into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6192
6193Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6194generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6195supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6196language, to make it possible to type them.
6197
6198The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6199character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6200
6201The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6202to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6203
6204You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6205
6206 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6207
6208Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6209characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6210argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6211already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6212characters for their work until they want to change.
6213
6214*** Input methods
6215
6216An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6217specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6218has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6219the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6220support several input methods.
6221
6222The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6223another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6224work.
6225
6226A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6227characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6228composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6229consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6230sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6231letter.
6232
6233The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6234by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6235First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6236marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6237mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6238
6239None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6240they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6241phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6242converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6243
6244Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6245word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6246typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6247the first guess is wrong.
6248
6249*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6250turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6251
6252If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6253byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6254they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6255the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6256
6257However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6258use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6259includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6260translate automatically to and from either one.
6261
6262*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6263
6264Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6265file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6266sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6267what you want.
6268
6269If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6270example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6271system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6272multibyte characters in that buffer.
6273
6274If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6275character conversion as well.
6276
6277*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6278
6279A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6280Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6281requires using many fonts.
6282
6283Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6284collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6285
6286A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6287the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6288have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6289you would use a font.
6290
6291If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6292specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6293display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6294
6295The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6296(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6297characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6298or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6299and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6300
6301*** Defining fontsets.
6302
6303Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6304chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6305with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6306
6307Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6308of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6309`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6310standard fontset are created automatically.
6311
6312If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6313argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6314FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6315with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6316name is `fontset-startup'.
6317
6318Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6319The resource value should have this form:
6320 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6321FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6322 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6323 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6324 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6325The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6326of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6327CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6328FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6329
6330Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6331last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6332You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6333
6334For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6335font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6336following resource,
6337 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6338the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6339 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6340Here is the substitution rule:
6341 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6342 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6343 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6344 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6345 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6346
6347The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6348fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6349that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6350
6351With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6352like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6353name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6354fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6355fontsets.
6356
6357*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6358defaults for a particular choice of language.
6359
6360Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6361method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6362visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6363already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6364language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6365system for new files that you create.
6366
6367It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6368set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6369whole Emacs session.
6370
6371For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6372chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6373with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6374
6375*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6376specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6377specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6378the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6379coding systems that Emacs supports.
6380
6381*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6382lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6383This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6384After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6385is used for *the immediately following command*.
6386
6387So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6388write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6389
6390If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6391then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6392
6393For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6394visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6395
6396*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6397construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6398to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6399specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6400of the file.
6401
6402*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6403the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6404code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6405translated into that character code.
6406
6407This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6408various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6409
6410By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6411
6412*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6413the coding system for keyboard input.
6414
6415Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6416with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6417some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6418
6419By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6420
6421Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6422input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6423translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6424to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6425designed to work with terminals.
6426
6427*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6428specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6429This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6430has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6431translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6432in the corresponding buffer.
6433
6434By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6435
6436*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6437to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6438It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6439
6440*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6441an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6442command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6443want to use.
6444
6445C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6446method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6447
6448*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6449layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6450remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6451which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6452
6453*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6454the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6455related information.
6456
6457*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6458HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6459scripts.
6460
6461*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6462information about the support for a particular language.
6463You specify the language as an argument.
6464
6465*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6466the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6467first dash.
6468
6469A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6470(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6471whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
64721 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6473
6474 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6475 B big5 (Chinese)
6476 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6477 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6478 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6479 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6480 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6481 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6482 K euc-korea (Korean)
6483 R koi8 (Russian)
6484 Q tibetan
6485 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6486 T lao
6487 T tis620 (Thai)
6488 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6489 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6490 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6491 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6492 z hz (Chinese)
6493
6494When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6495two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6496coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6497keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6498
6499*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6500conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6501
6502When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6503into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6504rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6505Rmail files themselves.
6506
6507*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6508conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6509
6510Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6511for sending mail:
6512
6513- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6514- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6515- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6516 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6517- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6518
6519*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6520to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6521Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6522translations.
6523
6524** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6525of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6526insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6527without any conversion.
6528
6529** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6530You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6531RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6532any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6533
6534** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6535functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6536
6537Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6538Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6539
6540Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6541mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6542
6543** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6544complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6545in the buffer before point.
6546
6547With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6548symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6549you are using.
6550
6551With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6552just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6553
6554** File locking works with NFS now.
6555
6556The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6557in the same directory as FILENAME.
6558
6559This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6560works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6561can become a bottleneck.
6562
6563The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6564does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6565create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6566file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6567rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6568so useful that the change is worth while.
6569
6570When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6571are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6572collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6573tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6574
6575** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6576it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6577show-paren-mode.
6578
6579** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6580selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6581delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6582
6583** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6584within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6585complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6586
6587** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6588it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6589set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6590
6591** Changes in View mode.
6592
6593*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6594Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6595
6596*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6597view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6598
6599*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6600previous state.
6601
6602*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6603scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6604
6605*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6606non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6607not just the selected window.
6608
6609*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6610read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6611turns View mode on or off.
6612
6613*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6614how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6615delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6616
6617** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6618now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6619
6620** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6621has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6622presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6623which version to compare with.
6624
6625** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6626blocks if a match is inside the block.
6627
6628The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6629is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6630isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6631shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6632
6633By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6634of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6635blocks, all of them or none.
6636
6637** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6638current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6639confirmation first.
6640
6641** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6642now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6643However, the mode will not be changed if
6644(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6645(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6646 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6647(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6648
6649This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6650
6651However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6652these commands do not change the major mode.
6653
6654** M-x occur changes.
6655
6656*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6657it performs a case-sensitive search.
6658
6659*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6660if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6661using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6662
6663** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6664in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6665window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6666that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6667buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6668
6669** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6670after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6671appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6672come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6673
6674** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6675selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6676buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6677
6678** Outline mode changes.
6679
6680*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6681
6682*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6683
6684** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6685you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6686Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6687was already active.
6688
6689The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6690unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6691get confused by it.
6692
6693If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6694set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6695
6696** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6697
6698*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6699conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6700character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6701including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6702
6703The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6704mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6705copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6706
6707*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6708are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6709values.
6710
6711`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6712case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6713`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6714case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6715
6716** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6717certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6718can be. The default value is 30.
6719
6720** Changes in Mail mode.
6721
6722*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6723Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6724composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6725`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6726`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6727behavior.
6728
6729C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6730compose-mail-other-frame.
6731
6732*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6733the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6734replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6735buffer that shows the original message.
6736
6737*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6738with separator lines around the contents.
6739
6740*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6741in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6742definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6743need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6744
6745*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6746
6747**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6748for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6749controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6750Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6751
6752**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6753to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6754/etc/passwd.
6755
6756**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6757to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6758/etc/passwd.
6759
6760** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6761special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6762directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6763reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6764
6765Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6766when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6767be taken to be magic.
6768
6769** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6770files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6771available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6772
6773M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6774(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6775
6776** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6777suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6778
6779In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6780
6781new key dired.el binding old key
6782------- ---------------- -------
6783 * c dired-change-marks c
6784 * m dired-mark m
6785 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6786 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6787 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6788 * u dired-unmark u
6789 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6790 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6791 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6792 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6793 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6794 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6795
6796** Rmail changes.
6797
6798*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6799saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6800chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6801each time you run it.
6802
6803*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6804whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6805
6806*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6807messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6808means to move in the opposite direction.
6809
6810*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6811you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6812
6813*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6814just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6815It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6816can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6817for output.
6818
6819** Gnus changes.
6820
6821*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6822
6823*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6824Gnus.
6825
6826*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6827`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6828
6829*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6830article mode line.
6831
6832*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6833
6834*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6835
6836(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6837
6838*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6839are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6840`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6841
6842*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6843
6844*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6845
6846*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6847See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6848
6849*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6850Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6851used to pick articles.
6852
6853*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6854another have been added.
6855
6856 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6857
6858*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6859generating lines in buffers.
6860
6861*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6862`M-C-_'.
6863
6864*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6865
6866*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6867
6868 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6869
6870*** Scores can be decayed.
6871
6872 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6873
6874*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6875Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6876
6877*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6878the native server.
6879
6880 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6881
6882*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6883(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6884
6885*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6886
6887*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6888even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6889
6890*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6891(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6892
6893 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6894 a group.
6895
6896*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6897sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6898
6899 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6900
6901*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6902
6903 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6904
6905*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6906
6907 Use the `Y c' command.
6908
6909*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6910
6911*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6912
6913 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6914
6915*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6916from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6917
6918 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6919
6920*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6921
6922*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6923the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6924
6925 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6926
6927Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6928and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6929from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6930hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6931this issue.)
6932
6933Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6934automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6935particular news group. This can be done by:
6936
6937 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6938
6939Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6940of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6941"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6942system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6943for reading and posting).
6944
6945CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6946 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6947Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6948newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6949there.
6950
6951Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6952default. Here are some of these default settings:
6953
6954 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6955 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6956 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6957 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6958 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6959
6960When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6961the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6962
6963** CC mode changes.
6964
6965*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6966code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6967values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6968this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6969Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6970loaded.
6971
6972If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6973Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6974style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6975share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6976c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6977must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6978
6979*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6980of the current buffer.
6981
6982*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6983it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6984of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6985
6986*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6987style that the Python developers like.
6988
6989*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6990This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6991just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6992
6993** VC Changes [new]
6994
6995** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6996name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6997directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6998
6999This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7000master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7001developers.
7002
7003You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7004RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7005
7006*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7007other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7008writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7009calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7010
7011*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7012version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7013
7014** Calendar changes.
7015
7016A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
7017of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
7018for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
7019
7020** ps-print changes
7021
7022There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
7023
7024*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7025
7026The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7027formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7028`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7029`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7030It defaults to `letter'.
7031If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7032
7033The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7034of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7035non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7036
7037The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7038It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7039It defaults to 1.
7040
7041*** Horizontal layout
7042
7043The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7044`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7045All are measured in points.
7046
7047*** Vertical layout
7048
7049The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7050`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7051All are measured in points.
7052
7053*** Headers
7054
7055If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7056`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7057margin above the text.
7058
7059If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7060framing box is printed around the header.
7061
7062The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7063`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7064
7065The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7066`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7067`ps-header-font-size'.
7068
7069*** Font managing
7070
7071The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7072used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7073`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7074elements to this alist.
7075
7076The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7077for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7078
7079** hideshow changes.
7080
7081*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7082C++, ; for lisp).
7083
7084*** Support for java-mode added.
7085
7086*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7087in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7088
7089*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7090the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7091way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7092
7093*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7094robust and a lot faster.
7095
7096*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7097
7098*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7099to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7100documentation for more details.
7101
7102** Changes in Enriched mode.
7103
7104*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7105filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7106of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7107use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7108the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7109
7110*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7111distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7112as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7113as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7114
7115** Font Lock mode
7116
7117*** Custom support
7118
7119The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7120font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7121faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7122group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7123your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7124consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7125
7126You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7127
7128*** Maximum decoration
7129
7130Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7131default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7132of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7133supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7134to get the old behavior.
7135
7136*** New support
7137
7138Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7139
7140Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7141support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7142
7143*** Configurable support
7144
7145Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7146additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7147c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7148java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7149list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7150of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7151convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7152
7153Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7154way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7155it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7156
7157*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7158
7159You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7160highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7161for any mode.
7162
7163For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7164
7165 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7166
7167in your ~/.emacs.
7168
7169*** New faces
7170
7171Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7172font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7173distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7174to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7175
7176*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7177
7178The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7179cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7180same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7181
7182*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7183
7184The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7185according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7186the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7187non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7188refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7189the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7190Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7191
7192This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7193For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7194this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7195refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7196containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7197the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7198
7199As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7200
7201Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7202Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7203Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7204new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7205
7206If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7207settings.
7208
7209** Ada mode changes.
7210
7211*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7212If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7213procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7214you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7215stubs.
7216
7217*** There are two new commands:
7218 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7219 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7220
7221The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7222`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7223`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7224
7225*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7226is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7227Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7228
7229*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7230formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7231places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7232space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7233
7234** Scheme mode changes.
7235
7236*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7237mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7238for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7239with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7240have any effect.
7241
7242If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7243still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7244scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7245variables as buffer-local variables.
7246
7247*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7248Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7249
7250** Changes to the emacsclient program
7251
7252*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7253USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7254associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7255can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7256
7257*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7258it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7259buffer in Emacs.
7260
7261*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7262use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7263ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7264option takes precedence.
7265
7266** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7267constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7268(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7269
7270** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7271which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7272the current defun.
7273
7274** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7275following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7276
7277** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7278and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7279necessary).
7280
7281** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7282if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7283these register values no longer become completely useless.
7284If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7285asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7286it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7287
7288** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7289example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7290be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7291you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7292
7293You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7294variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7295file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7296revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7297only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7298
7299** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7300since it applies only to the current frame.
7301
7302** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7303file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7304and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7305
7306This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7307multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7308variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7309tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7310instead of just the file you are editing.
7311
7312** RefTeX mode
7313
7314RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7315and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7316different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7317multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7318turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7319
7320C-c ( reftex-label
7321 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7322 knows which kind of label is needed.
7323
7324C-c ) reftex-reference
7325 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7326 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7327
7328C-c [ reftex-citation
7329 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7330 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7331
7332C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7333 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7334
7335C-c = reftex-toc
7336 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7337 can quickly jump to every section.
7338
7339Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7340commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7341Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7342reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7343C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7344
7345** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7346
7347*** Info documentation is now available.
7348
7349*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7350both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7351
7352*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7353bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7354
7355*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7356(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7357
7358*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7359entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7360appropriate functions.
7361
7362*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7363entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7364
7365*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7366been cleaned.
7367
7368*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7369bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7370
7371*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7372shall be delimited.
7373
7374*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7375bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7376bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7377
7378*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7379field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7380prefixed with `ALT'.
7381
7382*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7383bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7384formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7385documentation).
7386
7387*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7388documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7389for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7390
7391*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7392comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7393
7394*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7395alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7396signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7397
7398*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7399
7400*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7401
7402*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7403from alien sources.
7404
7405*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7406to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7407crossref entries.
7408
7409*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7410region.
7411
7412*** Added support for imenu.
7413
7414*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7415of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7416`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7417`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7418
7419*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7420from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7421
7422** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7423
7424** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7425
7426** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7427functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7428Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7429as an argument.
7430
7431When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7432and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7433
7434** browse-url changes
7435
7436*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7437Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7438(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7439non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7440customization variables.
7441
7442*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7443
7444*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7445lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7446(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7447
7448** Changes in Ediff
7449
7450*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7451pops up the Info file for this command.
7452
7453*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7454the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7455merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7456directories).
7457
7458*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7459and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7460files in the same directory.
7461
7462*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7463The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7464related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7465
7466** Changes in Viper
7467
7468*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7469*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7470 instead of vip-.
7471*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7472*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7473Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7474*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7475*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7476*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7477color when Viper is in insert state.
7478*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7479Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7480viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7481
7482** Etags changes.
7483
7484*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7485default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7486Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7487variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7488not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7489
7490*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7491
7492*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7493constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7494
7495*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7496recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7497In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7498
7499*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7500C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7501recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7502methods and protocols.
7503
7504*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7505.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7506column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7507paragraph name.
7508
7509*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7510an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7511at least M times and as many as N times.
7512
7513** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7514in files has changed slightly.
7515
7516With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7517time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7518This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7519with old time-stamp-format values.
7520
7521In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7522(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7523This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7524reasons.
7525
7526In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7527natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7528fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7529(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7530time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7531specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7532
7533Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7534case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7535truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7536
7537The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7538being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7539future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7540recommended now will continue to work then.
7541
7542See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7543details.
7544
7545** There are some additional major modes:
7546
7547dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7548m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7549meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7550
7551** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7552copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7553into Emacs.
7554
7555** New Lisp packages include:
7556
7557*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7558
7559*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7560be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7561
7562*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7563
7564*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7565in shell buffers.
7566
7567*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7568See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7569and `elint-defun'.
7570
7571*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7572meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7573ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7574strings or comments.
7575
7576These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7577abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7578you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7579insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7580at these points.
7581
7582*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7583can visit them by short forms of their names.
7584
7585*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7586Emacs Lisp function at point.
7587
7588*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7589
7590*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7591switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7592
7593*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7594
7595*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7596
7597*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7598
7599*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7600from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7601
7602*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7603You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7604inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7605original place after inserting the copy.
7606
7607*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7608on the buffer.
7609
7610You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7611velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7612(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7613
7614Enable mouse-drag with:
7615 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7616-or-
7617 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7618
7619*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7620mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7621
7622*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7623It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7624
7625*** ogonek
7626
7627The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7628Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7629platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7630TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7631ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7632prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7633instance) and vice versa.
7634
7635To use this package load it using
7636 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7637Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7638 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7639 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7640The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7641ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7642
7643*** Interface to ph.
7644
7645Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7646
7647The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7648services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7649these servers.
7650
7651*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7652
7653*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7654You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7655while the real cursor does not move.
7656
7657*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7658for visiting your favorite web sites.
7659
7660*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7661so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7662
7663** movemail change
7664
7665Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7666mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7667supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7668user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7669
7670This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7671\f
7672* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7673
7674** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7675
7676Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7677end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7678Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7679file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7680file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7681
7682To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7683C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7684coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7685specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7686LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7687save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7688\f
7689* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7690
7691** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7692Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7693vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7694Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7695
7696** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7697to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7698
7699In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7700don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7701"win".
7702
7703** Basic Lisp changes
7704
7705*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7706evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7707
7708*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7709be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7710or by the user.
7711
7712The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7713
7714*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7715
7716(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7717(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7718
7719*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7720usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7721its argument.
7722
7723*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7724
7725*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7726
7727*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7728
7729*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7730error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7731include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7732`format' function.
7733
7734*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7735or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7736whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7737
7738*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7739either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7740adding one of these suffixes.
7741
7742*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7743which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7744If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7745
7746We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7747because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7748
7749*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7750
7751*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7752You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7753
7754*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7755conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7756
7757 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7758
7759BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7760BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7761
7762*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7763choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7764restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7765works using `save-current-buffer'.
7766
7767*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7768write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7769of the last form.
7770
7771*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7772which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7773last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7774as the last form.
7775
7776*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7777characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7778matches.
7779
7780For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7781
7782*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7783with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7784Then it returns that string.
7785
7786For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7787
7788(with-output-to-string
7789 (princ "The buffer is ")
7790 (princ (buffer-name)))
7791
7792returns "The buffer is foo".
7793
7794** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7795is non-nil.
7796
7797These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7798buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7799characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7800
7801*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7802a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7803
7804Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7805character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7806Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7807position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7808characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7809 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7810
7811ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7812Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7813non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7814characters".
7815
7816The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7817through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7818"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7819range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7820leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7821
7822*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7823(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7824multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7825character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7826
7827This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7828always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7829
7830However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7831
7832*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7833because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7834have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7835the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7836guaranteed.
7837
7838*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7839between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7840character).
7841
7842When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7843
7844 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7845 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7846 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7847 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7848 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7849
7850*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7851
7852*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7853`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7854more than the number of characters.
7855
7856You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7857it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7858\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7859is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7860follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7861newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7862
7863*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7864and returns a string containing those characters.
7865
7866*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7867(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7868counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7869character, sref signals an error.
7870
7871*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7872in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7873string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7874
7875*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7876in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7877region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7878
7879*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7880the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7881to a vector of the characters in it.
7882
7883*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7884of a string. You call it as follows:
7885
7886 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7887
7888This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7889STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7890This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7891Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7892it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7893
7894*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7895if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7896
7897*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7898if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7899
7900*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7901to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7902not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7903which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7904
7905(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7906
7907This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7908
7909The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7910If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7911are not included in the resulting value.
7912
7913The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7914at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7915WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7916is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7917
7918If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7919place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7920character extends across that column), then the padding character
7921PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7922string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7923column START-COLUMN.
7924
7925*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7926the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7927necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7928difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7929changed text, before the change.
7930
7931*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7932sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7933one character set for each script, not for each language.
7934
7935**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7936
7937**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7938
7939**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7940set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7941
7942**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7943name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7944which identify the character within that character set.
7945
7946**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7947byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7948opposite of split-char.
7949
7950**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7951of all the characters between BEG and END.
7952
7953**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7954of all the characters in a string.
7955
7956*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7957and specifying coding systems.
7958
7959**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7960system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7961of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7962(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7963and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7964as what to do about code conversion.)
7965
7966**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7967name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7968
7969**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7970for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7971except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7972
7973Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7974which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7975to match against a file name.
7976
7977VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7978a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7979decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7980to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7981systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7982specifies the coding system for encoding.
7983
7984If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7985or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7986
7987**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7988the coding system to use for network sockets.
7989
7990Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7991which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7992either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7993service names.
7994
7995VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7996a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7997decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7998to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7999systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8000specifies the coding system for encoding.
8001
8002If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8003or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8004
8005**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8006for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8007except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8008start the subprocess.
8009
8010**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8011systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8012when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8013(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8014to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8015
8016**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8017coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8018subprocess.
8019
8020It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8021but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8022start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8023connection permanently or until overridden.
8024
8025The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8026file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8027network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8028coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8029It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8030system for one operation at a time.
8031
8032**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8033files, subprocesses or network connections.
8034
8035**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8036coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8037The value is a cons cell,
8038 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8039where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8040the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8041input to the subprocess.
8042
8043**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8044change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8045
8046** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8047customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8048you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8049
8050You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8051variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8052information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8053legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8054customization.
8055
8056Thus, instead of writing
8057
8058 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8059 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8060
8061you would now write this:
8062
8063 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8064 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8065 :type 'boolean
8066 :group foo)
8067
8068The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8069two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8070describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8071for a description of them.
8072
8073The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8074should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8075
8076 (defgroup ispell nil
8077 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8078 :group 'processes)
8079
8080The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8081group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8082but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8083to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8084second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8085
8086Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8087package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8088have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8089package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8090first-level subgroups.
8091
8092** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8093
8094This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8095separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8096
8097** easy-mmode
8098
8099The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8100developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8101only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8102predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8103`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8104`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8105
8106** Text property changes
8107
8108*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8109text property.
8110
8111*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8112previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8113place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8114functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8115starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8116
8117If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8118LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8119of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8120position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8121
8122*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8123value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8124is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8125
8126** Changes in invisibility features
8127
8128*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8129hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8130is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8131should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8132would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8133make the overlay visible.
8134
8135During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8136invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8137needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8138which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8139the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8140t when it should hide it.
8141
8142*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8143
8144Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8145invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8146and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8147Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8148manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8149Here is an example of how to do this:
8150
8151 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8152 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8153 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8154 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8155
8156 ...
8157 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8158
8159 ...
8160 ;; When done with the overlays:
8161 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8162 ;; Or respectively:
8163 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8164
8165** Changes in syntax parsing.
8166
8167*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8168`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8169obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8170`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8171
8172If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8173is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8174used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8175
8176When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8177character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8178
8179 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8180 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8181
8182 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8183 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8184 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8185
8186 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8187 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8188 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8189 determine the syntax type of the character.
8190
8191 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8192 of the current buffer.
8193
8194*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8195value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8196for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8197
8198*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8199and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8200only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8201character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8202another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8203
8204These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8205text property.
8206
8207*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8208arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8209of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8210
8211*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8212(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8213element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8214nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8215string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8216
8217*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8218syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8219`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8220
8221** Changes in face features
8222
8223*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8224if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8225
8226*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8227of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8228
8229*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8230set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8231
8232*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8233set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8234
8235*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8236by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8237and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8238the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8239overlay property).
8240
8241This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8242arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8243
8244** Changes in file-handling functions
8245
8246*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8247directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8248they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8249is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8250
8251This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8252begins with ~.
8253
8254*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8255it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8256
8257*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8258the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8259
8260*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8261as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8262
8263*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8264character code conversion as well as other things.
8265
8266Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8267(formerly it did not).
8268
8269*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8270environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8271
8272*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8273instead of constant strings.
8274
8275*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8276to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8277any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8278
8279substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8280in the same way as before.
8281
8282*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8283The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8284which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8285
8286*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8287error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8288else, and returns nil.
8289
8290*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8291directory cannot be listed.
8292
8293** Changes in minibuffer input
8294
8295*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8296read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8297additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8298argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8299ways:
8300
8301 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8302 It is available through the history command M-n.
8303
8304*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8305read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8306argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8307minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8308enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8309
8310In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8311argument in this way.
8312
8313*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8314from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8315minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8316
8317** Echo area features
8318
8319*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8320echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8321minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8322after the echo area is cleared.
8323
8324*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8325in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8326
8327** Keyboard input features
8328
8329*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8330set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8331
8332*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8333received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8334by keyboard macros.
8335
8336** Frame-related changes
8337
8338*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8339creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8340hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8341
8342*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8343the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8344has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8345
8346*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8347selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8348value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8349in the selected frame.
8350
8351*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8352is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8353which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8354
8355** X Windows features
8356
8357*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8358x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8359x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8360
8361*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8362The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8363
8364*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8365MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8366A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8367
8368If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8369it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8370
8371** Subprocess features
8372
8373*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8374functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8375automatically.
8376
8377*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8378and returns the output from the command as a string.
8379
8380*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8381and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8382
8383** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8384does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8385
8386** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8387at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8388goes after the other menu items.
8389
8390** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8391of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8392around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8393are in use.
8394
8395The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8396series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8397
8398Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8399after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8400form.
8401
8402** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8403is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8404but its hook is still run.
8405
8406** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8407for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8408
8409If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8410regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8411useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8412
8413This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8414are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8415filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8416warned.
8417
8418** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8419way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8420
8421** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8422integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8423functions like display-time.
8424
8425** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8426name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8427
8428** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8429can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8430is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8431
8432** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8433if there is an error in compilation.
8434
8435** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8436switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8437argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8438they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8439
8440** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8441Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8442the *scratch* buffer.
8443
8444** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8445The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8446where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8447e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8448
8449** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8450and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8451It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8452
8453** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8454using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8455variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8456and compose-mail-other-frame.
8457
8458** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8459can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8460full name of the specified user will be returned.
8461
8462** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8463of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8464where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8465in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8466option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8467files at all.
8468
8469** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8470and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8471width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8472the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8473
8474For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8475minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8476with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8477is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8478
8479** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8480
8481** imenu.el changes.
8482
8483You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8484item from menu created by imenu.
8485
8486An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8487#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8488select one of those items.
8489\f
8490* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8491\f
8492* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8493
8494** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8495mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8496
8497** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8498use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8499Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8500\f
8501* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8502
8503** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8504To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8505
8506** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8507conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8508matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8509expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8510word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8511all caps.
8512
8513** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8514at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8515
8516When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8517does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8518as in previous Emacs versions.
8519
8520** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8521non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8522time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8523frames.
8524
8525** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8526if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8527This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8528Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8529accident.
8530
8531** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8532keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8533It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8534line and then executing the macro.
8535
8536This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8537
8538** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8539(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8540characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8541characters.
8542
8543** Font Lock mode
8544
8545*** Font Lock support modes
8546
8547Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8548below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8549hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8550to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8551Font Lock mode is enabled.
8552
8553For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8554
8555 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8556
8557in your ~/.emacs.
8558
8559*** lazy-lock
8560
8561The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8562only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8563becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8564Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8565occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8566buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8567Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8568
8569To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8570
8571 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8572
8573To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8574
8575** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8576
8577*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8578paren and key.
8579
8580*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8581supported.
8582
8583** Gnus changes.
8584
8585Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8586commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8587significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8588previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8589
8590Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8591between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8592
8593*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8594variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8595obsolete.
8596
8597*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8598missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8599
8600 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8601
8602*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8603
8604 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8605
8606*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8607referred.
8608
8609*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8610
8611 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8612
8613*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8614
8615 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8616
8617*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8618buffers.
8619
8620 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8621
8622*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8623
8624 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8625
8626*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8627
8628 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8629
8630*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8631
8632 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8633
8634*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8635is possible.
8636
8637 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8638
8639*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8640groups of groups.
8641
8642*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8643
8644*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8645batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8646
8647*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8648
8649*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8650
8651*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8652
8653 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8654
8655*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8656expiration times.
8657
8658*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8659
8660*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8661process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8662
8663*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8664articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8665bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8666
8667*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8668articles with the `*' command.
8669
8670*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8671
8672*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8673
8674 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8675
8676*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8677
8678*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8679`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8680
8681*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8682buffer.
8683
8684*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8685
8686*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8687
8688*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8689
8690 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8691
8692*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8693
8694 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8695
8696*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8697
8698*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8699
8700*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8701
8702 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8703 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8704
8705*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8706refetching.
8707
8708 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8709
8710*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8711buffer to allow easier treatment.
8712
8713*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8714
8715*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8716
8717 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8718
8719*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8720articles.
8721
8722 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8723
8724*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8725
8726*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8727cited text to hide is now customizable.
8728
8729 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8730
8731*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8732
8733 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8734
8735*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8736
8737*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8738
8739The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8740in greater detail.
8741\f
8742* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8743
8744** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8745second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8746asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8747exists.
8748
8749** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8750as well as lists.
8751
8752** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8753of a given keymap.
8754
8755** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8756given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8757keymap or nil.
8758
8759** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8760an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8761name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8762menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8763equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8764alias.
8765\f
8766* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8767
8768** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8769
8770Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8771This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8772was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8773far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8774pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8775
8776For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8777you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8778`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8779
8780** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8781
8782The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8783do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8784It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8785much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8786chapter of the manual for details.
8787
8788However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8789customization variables take effect.
8790
8791** Marking with the mouse.
8792
8793When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8794highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8795using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8796
8797** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8798
8799*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8800
8801*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8802to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8803
8804*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8805in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8806you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8807application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8808applications, these problems are significant.
8809
8810If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8811likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8812However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8813will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8814other DOS application as a subprocess.
8815
8816Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8817You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8818
8819If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8820subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8821have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8822Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8823separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8824Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8825
8826** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8827
8828This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8829which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8830minibuffer contains.
8831
8832** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8833
8834The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8835It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8836It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8837affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8838
8839The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8840it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8841and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8842when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8843
8844** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8845enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8846
8847** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8848F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8849Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8850
8851If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8852menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8853something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8854the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8855
8856 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8857
8858** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8859to replace the characters it "deletes".
8860
8861** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8862
8863** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8864a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8865select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8866It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8867immediately after the selected one.
8868
8869This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8870made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8871
8872** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8873
8874Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8875directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8876If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8877Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8878recover-session.
8879
8880You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8881auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8882will not work.
8883
8884Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8885normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8886this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8887bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8888now that the bug is fixed.
8889
8890** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8891
8892There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8893when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8894Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8895which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8896
8897If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8898telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8899VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8900the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8901
8902** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8903Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8904is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8905
8906There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8907Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8908enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8909The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8910remain normal.
8911
8912** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8913header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8914
8915Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8916known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8917offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8918Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8919
8920Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8921of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8922a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8923name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8924documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8925`mail-directory-stream'.)
8926
8927** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8928skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8929characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8930with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8931
8932Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8933- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8934wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8935
8936The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8937less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8938headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8939Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8940Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8941fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8942to a limitation in font-lock).
8943
8944External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8945
8946** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8947buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8948buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8949this example:
8950
8951 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8952 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8953
8954** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8955
8956*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8957
8958*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8959
8960*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8961
8962*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8963entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8964will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8965isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8966(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8967The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8968
8969*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8970does the same job.
8971
8972*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8973"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8974
8975*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8976text.
8977
8978** Font Lock mode
8979
8980*** Global Font Lock mode
8981
8982Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8983new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8984font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8985turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8986on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8987
8988For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8989
8990 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8991
8992in your ~/.emacs.
8993
8994*** Local Refontification
8995
8996In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8997However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8998those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8999command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
9000
9001In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
9002(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
9003current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
9004above and below point.
9005
9006With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
9007
9008** Follow mode
9009
9010Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
9011buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
9012side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
9013they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
9014split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
9015follow-mode.
9016
9017M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
9018
9019To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
9020command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
9021
9022** hide-show changes.
9023
9024The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
9025to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
9026normal hooks.
9027
9028** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
9029The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
9030
9031** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
9032recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
9033those that begin a function, record, or macro.
9034
9035** MSDOS Changes
9036
9037*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
9038Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9039
9040*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9041and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9042
9043*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9044
9045*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9046pressing both mouse buttons.
9047
9048*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9049restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9050are:
9051
9052**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9053now works.
9054
9055**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9056
9057**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9058implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9059
9060**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9061
9062**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9063
9064**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9065
9066**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9067
9068**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
9069\f
9070* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9071
9072** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9073tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9074remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9075this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9076behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9077
9078** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9079
9080The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9081not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9082need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9083be different.
9084
9085It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9086than `system-type'.
9087
9088See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9089
9090** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9091now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9092
9093** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9094that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9095
9096** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9097no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9098reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9099
9100The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9101to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9102like this:
9103
9104 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9105
9106SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9107It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9108becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9109
9110REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9111seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9112means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9113
9114*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9115up if too much time passes.
9116
9117 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9118
9119This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9120If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9121of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9122form in BODY.
9123
9124*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9125a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9126call looks like this:
9127
9128 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9129
9130SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9131runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9132timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9133ARGS.
9134
9135Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9136command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9137command.
9138
9139REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9140time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9141does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9142each time Emacs becomes idle.
9143
9144If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9145idle for SECS seconds.
9146
9147*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9148all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9149programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9150instead.
9151
9152*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9153there is no answer within a certain time.
9154
9155 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9156
9157asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9158within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9159Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9160
9161** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9162arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9163meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9164arguments in between are ignored.
9165
9166This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9167the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9168
9169** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9170/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9171/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9172site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9173version.
9174
9175It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9176version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9177for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9178has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9179and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9180problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9181
9182** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9183.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9184systems with limited file name syntax.
9185
9186Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9187convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9188for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9189completions.el:
9190
9191(defvar save-completions-file-name
9192 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9193 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9194
9195This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9196depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9197convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9198Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9199MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9200
9201** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9202rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9203minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9204
9205** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9206marker from its buffer position.
9207
9208** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9209Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9210The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9211
9212** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9213that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9214condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9215of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9216matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9217regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9218
9219This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9220errors that happen often during editing.
9221
9222** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9223into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9224puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9225
9226** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9227now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9228
9229** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9230a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9231name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9232to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9233and not get-buffer-window.
9234
9235** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9236calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9237being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9238
9239If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9240buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9241property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9242non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9243are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9244property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9245over and over for the same text.
9246
9247** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9248
9249*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9250in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9251
9252;; @(#) HEADER: text
9253;; $HEADER: text $
9254
9255in addition to the normal
9256
9257;; HEADER: text
9258
9259*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9260checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9261lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9262
9263
a933dad1 9264\f
3787e12e 9265* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9266
9267----------------------------------------------------------------------
9268Copyright information:
9269
424d8b44 9270Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9271
9272 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9273 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9274 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9275 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9276
9277 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9278 of this document, or of portions of it,
9279 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9280 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9281\f
9282Local variables:
9283mode: outline
9284paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9285end: